See in Reader
Correct "General Information:" notes
This commit is contained in:
Larry Sallee
parent
64ea22e24e
commit
9bd146b17a
|
|
@ -2174,7 +2174,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
|
|||
15:23 p4g9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπαρχὴ Χριστός 1 Here, just as in [15:20](../15/20.md), **firstfruits** refers to what farmers first gathered from their fields. Often, these **firstfruits** were offered to God to thank him for providing food. What Paul emphasizes here is that **firstfruits** implies that there will be more “fruits”, that is, crops or produce. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that Paul uses **firstfruits** to emphasize that Jesus’ resurrection implies that there will be more resurrections with an analogy or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Christ, who is like the firstfruits” or “the guarantee” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
15:23 bzh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **his coming** refers specifically to Jesus “coming back” to earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **at his coming** with a phrase that more clearly refers to Jesus’ “second coming.” Alternate translation: “when he comes again” or “at his return” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
15:23 xr5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession οἱ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the ones** who belong to or believe in **Christ**. If your language does not use that form for this meaning, you can express the idea with a phrase such as “belong to” or “believe in.” Alternate translation: “those who believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||||
15:24 any2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential εἶτα 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **Then** introduces events that occur after the “coming” in the last verse ([15:23](../15/23.md)). Paul does not clarify how soon after the “coming” these events will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Then** with a word or phrase that more clearly identifies events happening in sequence. Alternate translation: “Next will be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||||
15:23-24 any2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential εἶτα 1 # General Information:\n\In verse [15:24](../15/24.md), **Then** introduces events that occur after the “coming” in the last verse ([15:23](../15/23.md)). Paul does not clarify how soon after the “coming” these events will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Then** with a word or phrase that more clearly identifies events happening in sequence. Alternate translation: “Next will be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||||
15:24 fp4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ τέλος 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **the end** identifies that something has reached its goal and thus ended. Paul does not state explicitly what **end** he has in mind, but the Corinthians would have inferred that he meant **the end** of the world as it currently exists. This does not mean that there will be no more world, but it means that things will be very different after **the end**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind what **end** Paul is speaking about explicitly. Alternate translation: “the end of this world” or “the end of the way things are now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
15:24 towh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ὅταν παραδιδῷ τὴν Βασιλείαν τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί; ὅταν καταργήσῃ πᾶσαν ἀρχὴν, καὶ πᾶσαν ἐξουσίαν, καὶ δύναμιν 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **when he has abolished** will occur before **when he hands over**. In Paul’s language, the sequence is clear even though the events are not in order. If your language would put the events in order, you could rearrange these two clauses to make the sequence clearer. Alternate translation: “when he has abolished all rule and all authority and power, when he hands over the kingdom to the God and Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||||
15:24 u298 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns παραδιδῷ & καταργήσῃ 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **he** refers to “Christ.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express to whom **he** refers with “Christ” in one or both of these places. Alternate translation: “Christ hands over … Christ has abolished” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
Can't render this file because it is too large.
|
|
|
@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ front:intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
|
|||
1:2 iam1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **Grace** and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “May God multiply his kind acts to you and give you a more peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
1:2 z7df rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 Peter speaks of **Grace** and **peace** as if they were objects that could increase in size or number. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different metaphor that means that these things will increase, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “May grace and peace increase in your lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
1:2 gj71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May God multiply grace and peace to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
1:3 y6aq 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter begins to talk about the believers’ salvation and faith. [Verses 3–5](../01/03.md) are one sentence, but you may need to divide them into shorter sentences in your language.
|
||||
1:3-5 y6aq 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter begins to talk about the believers’ salvation and faith. [Verses 3–5](../01/03.md) are one sentence, but you may need to divide them into shorter sentences in your language.
|
||||
1:3 l4vi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative εὐλογητὸς 1 Peter is using a statement to give an exhortation. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for exhortation. Alternate translation: “Let us bless” or “Let us praise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||||
1:3 z6wk rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
|
||||
1:3 cyf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμᾶς 1 The words **our** and **us** are inclusive. They refer to Peter and those believers to whom he is writing. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In
|
|||
3:10 eb26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς τὸ ἰδεῖν ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον 1 Here, the phrase **to see your face** is an idiom meaning “visit.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to visit you” or “to spend time with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
3:10 s0xz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον 1 Paul refers to **your face** to mean the whole Thessalonian church. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “all of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
3:10 e5fh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ καταρτίσαι τὰ ὑστερήματα τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use the abstract noun **faith**, you can express the idea behind it in another way (See also [2:17](../02/17.md)). Alternate translation: “and to provide support so that you remain faithful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
3:11 tet9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing δὲ & κατευθύναι 1 # General Information:\n\nHere the verb forms indicate that this is a blessing or prayer that continues through [3:13](../03/13.md). Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “Now we pray that … would guide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
|
||||
3:11-13 tet9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing δὲ & κατευθύναι 1 # General Information:\n\nHere the verb forms indicate that this is a blessing or prayer that continues through [3:13](../03/13.md). Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “Now we pray that … would guide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
|
||||
3:11 f3wh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our God and Father** refers to the one divine person who is both God and Father. This phrase is a hendiadys, since Father further describes God (See also [1:3](../01/03.md)). Alternate translation: “God our Father” or “our Father God” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys)
|
||||
3:11 mc2m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς 1 Paul uses the word **himself** to distinguish **our God and Father** from **our Lord Jesus**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||||
3:11 bql9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν 1 It is possible that these first two uses of **our** are inclusive of the whole Christian Church. Yet, the third use of **our** exclusively refers to the apostles. So, it is most likely that **our** refers exclusively to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy in this whole verse (see also [1:9, 2:1, 3:9](../01/09.md)). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
|
@ -1021,7 +1021,7 @@ front:intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
7:34 atdo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 3 God is using the word translated **And** to introduce what he wants Moses to do as a result of what he has told him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
7:34 sq8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative νῦν δεῦρο 1 God is giving an order here. Alternate translation: “get ready” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||||
7:34 x34c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 God is not asking Moses’ permission when he says **let me send you to Egypt**. This is a way of saying “I will send you to Egypt,” and that statement in turn is functioning as a command. Alternate translation: “you must go to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||||
7:35 x4p2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany τοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν 1 # General Information:\n\nVerses 35, 36, 37, and 38 contains a series of similar phrases emphasizing the role of Moses. Stephen says **This Moses**, “This one,” “This is the Moses,” and “This is the one.” If possible, use similar statements in your own translation to emphasize Moses. You may also wish to make each of these verses a separate paragraph or use formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
|
||||
7:35-38 x4p2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany τοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν 1 # General Information:\n\nVerses 35, 36, 37, and 38 contains a series of similar phrases emphasizing the role of Moses. Stephen says **This Moses**, “This one,” “This is the Moses,” and “This is the one.” If possible, use similar statements in your own translation to emphasize Moses. You may also wish to make each of these verses a separate paragraph or use formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
|
||||
7:35 nv5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἰπόντες, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. See what you did in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||||
7:35 vuqy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν? 1 See how you translated this rhetorical question in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and a judge!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
7:35 oic6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν 1 See how you translated the combination of **ruler** and **judge** in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1162,7 +1162,7 @@ front:intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
8:1 xp25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πάντες & διεσπάρησαν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they all fled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
8:1 u5pi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες & διεσπάρησαν 1 The word **all** is a generalization that emphasizes that a large number of the believers were affected. Alternate translation: “many of the believers were scattered” or “many of the believers fled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||||
8:1 k5a2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 The implication is that **the apostles** remained in Jerusalem, even though they too experienced this great persecution. Alternate translation: “except the apostles, who remained in Jerusalem despite the persecution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
8:2 tp9e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge συνεκόμισαν δὲ τὸν Στέφανον ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς, καὶ ἐποίησαν κοπετὸν μέγαν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 # General Information:\n\nIt may be helpful to your readers to move these parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge for verses 1-2 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||||
8:1-2 tp9e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge συνεκόμισαν δὲ τὸν Στέφανον ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς, καὶ ἐποίησαν κοπετὸν μέγαν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 # General Information:\n\nIt may be helpful to your readers to move the parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge for verses 1-2 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||||
8:2 sjc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνεκόμισαν & τὸν Στέφανον 1 The word translated **carried away** means to carry away for burial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. You could also say explicitly that it was Stephen’s body that these men carried away. Alternate translation: “carried Stephen’s body away to bury it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
8:3 yd2i κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους 1 Alternate translation: “entering one house after another”
|
||||
8:3 w6vk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους & τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας 1 Luke may mean **houses** where Christians met, as described in [2:46](../02/46.md), and he means **men and women** who believed in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the houses where Christians met … believers in Jesus, both men and women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
Can't render this file because it is too large.
|
|
|
@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduc
|
|||
5:31 yp24 0 # General Information:\n\nThe word **his** refers to a male believer who marries.
|
||||
5:31 abef rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀντὶ τούτου 1 The connecting phrase **Because of this** introduces the result of a reason-result relationship. In this case, this phrase is part of a quotation from Genesis 2:24 and so the reason is not stated here, but it is stated in Genesis 2:23 that woman was created out of man. The result is that a man will leave his father and mother and be joined to his wife. If it is confusing to not state the reason, you could include a footnote that says, “the reason for this is that woman was created out of man. See Genesis 2:23” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
6:intro r7c3 0 # Ephesians 6 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Slavery\n\nPaul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches about working to please God whether as a slave or as a master. What Paul teaches here about slavery would have been surprising. In his time, masters were not expected to treat their slaves with respect and not threaten them.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Armor of God\n\nThis extended metaphor describes how Christians can protect themselves when spiritually attacked. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
6:1 wq46 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you 0 # General Information:\n\nThe command in verse one is plural. Then in verses two and three Paul quotes from the law of Moses. Moses was talking to the people of Israel as though they were one person, so **your** and **you** are singular there. If that does not make sense, you may need to translate them as plurals. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||||
6:1-3 wq46 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you 0 # General Information:\n\nThe command in verse one is plural. Then in verses two and three Paul quotes from the law of Moses. Moses was talking to the people of Israel as though they were one person, so **your** and **you** are singular there. If that does not make sense, you may need to translate them as plurals. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||||
6:1 jf17 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul continues to explain how Christians are to submit themselves to each other. He gives instructions to children, fathers, workers, and masters.
|
||||
6:1 ev8m ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Alternate translation: “because you belong to the Lord” or “as followers of the Lord”
|
||||
6:1 abeg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 The connecting word **for** introduces the reason of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that children should do what is right. The result is that children should obey their parents. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
269
tn_EXO.tsv
269
tn_EXO.tsv
|
|
@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
3:15 l962 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes יְהוָ֞ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתֵיכֶ֗ם אֱלֹהֵ֨י אַבְרָהָ֜ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֛ק וֵאלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹ֖ב שְׁלָחַ֣נִי אֲלֵיכֶ֑ם זֶה־שְּׁמִ֣י לְעֹלָ֔ם וְזֶ֥ה זִכְרִ֖י לְדֹ֥ר דֹּֽר 1 This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. It may be possible to translate it as an indirect quotation, but you will need to be careful to correctly change the pronoun persons. Alternative translation: “You must tell the Israelites that Yahweh, the God of their fathers, the God of Abraham, the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob, sent you to them. This is his name forever, and this is his memorial from generation to generation.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||||
3:15 d91k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתֵיכֶ֗ם 1 Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of your ancestors” or “the God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
3:15 ixcb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism לְדֹ֥ר דֹּֽר 1 The repetition of **generation** is indicating “to each and every generation” which means “for all people at all times.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||||
3:16 ec3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks יְהוָ֞ה 1 # General Information:\n\nThis begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 17](../03/17.md). It contains a third-level quotation that begins at “I have certainly” and also continues to the end of verse 17. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. The closing marks for both the second and third-level quotations should not occur until the end of verse 17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
3:16-17 ec3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks יְהוָ֞ה 1 This begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 17](../03/17.md). It contains a third-level quotation that begins at “I have certainly” and also continues to the end of verse 17. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. The closing marks for both the second and third-level quotations should not occur until the end of verse 17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
3:16 usas rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy אֱלֹהֵ֤י אֲבֹֽתֵיכֶם֙ 1 Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “the God of your ancestors” or “the God whom your ancestors worshiped” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
3:16 xqy9 אַבְרָהָ֛ם יִצְחָ֥ק וְיַעֲקֹ֖ב 1 Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob were three of the Israelites’ ancestors. They all worshiped the same God.
|
||||
3:16 dvsz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks פָּקֹ֤ד פָּקַ֨דְתִּי֙ 1 This begins a third-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 17](../03/17.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation that is within a quotation. The closing marks for both the second-level and third-level quotations should not occur until the end of verse 17. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
3:18 r74o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession וְזִקְנֵ֨י יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 This is a possessive of social relationship. Alternative translation: “elders in charge of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||||
3:18 eep7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 **Israel** is a collective noun that refers to all the Israelites. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternative translation: “the Israelites” or “the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
|
||||
3:18 ot9r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy מִצְרַ֗יִם 1 Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptian nation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
3:18 idp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual וַאֲמַרְתֶּ֤ם 1 # General Information:\n\nIf your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||||
3:18 idp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual וַאֲמַרְתֶּ֤ם 1 If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||||
3:18 i47o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive עָלֵ֔ינוּ & נֵֽלֲכָה & וְנִזְבְּחָ֖ה 1 These instances of **us** are exclusive; they include Moses, the elders, and all the Israelites, but exclude the king of Egypt. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||||
3:18 d85b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֤שֶׁת 1 Alternate translation: “3” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
|
||||
3:19 qf46 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְלֹ֖א בְּיָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה 1 The word **hand** is a metonym for the power of the owner of the hand. There are two further difficulties: (1) Whose hand (power) is being referred to, (2) does the negative mean “not unless” or “not even?” Possible meanings include: (1) “only if he sees that he has no power to do anything else,” where the **hand** belongs to Pharaoh (2) “only if I force him to let you go,” where the **hand** belongs to Yahweh, taking “not unless” for the negative (3) “not even if I force him to let you go,” where the **hand** belongs to Yahweh, taking “not even” for the negative (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
8:21 hwcl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns הֶעָרֹ֑ב & הֶ֣עָרֹ֔ב 1 Here, **the swarm** is a collective singular noun that refers to a great number of flying, biting insects traveling in a group. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “swarms of flies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
|
||||
8:21 l5z7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הֶעָרֹ֑ב & הֶ֣עָרֹ֔ב 1 Here, **the swarm** probably refers to the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
8:21 foli rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism בְּךָ֜ וּבַעֲבָדֶ֧יךָ וּֽבְעַמְּךָ֛ וּבְבָתֶּ֖יךָ & בָּתֵּ֤י מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ & וְגַ֥ם הָאֲדָמָ֖ה 1 This long list means “everywhere in Egypt.” It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that the flies’ location is not limited to these specific places but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||||
8:22 mv8w rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal לְבִלְתִּ֥י הֱיֽוֹת־שָׁ֖ם עָרֹ֑ב 1 # General Information:\n\nThis is the goal of Yahweh treating the land of Goshen differently. Alternate translation: “by keeping the swarm from there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
|
||||
8:22 mv8w rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal לְבִלְתִּ֥י הֱיֽוֹת־שָׁ֖ם עָרֹ֑ב 1 This is the goal of Yahweh treating the land of Goshen differently. Alternate translation: “by keeping the swarm from there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
|
||||
8:22 apum rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns עָרֹ֑ב 1 This is a collective singular noun that refers to a great number of swarming, biting insects. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md). Alternate translation: “swarms of flies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
|
||||
8:22 qb9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown עָרֹ֑ב 1 These are probably the common large flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
8:22 refq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal לְמַ֣עַן תֵּדַ֔ע כִּ֛י אֲנִ֥י יְהוָ֖ה בְּקֶ֥רֶב הָאָֽרֶץ 1 This is the goal of treating the Israelites differently. In some languages you may need to put this phrase the beginning of the verse. Use a natural way in your language for indicating purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -701,7 +701,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
8:31 mb4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole לֹ֥א נִשְׁאַ֖ר אֶחָֽד 1 This extreme statement emphasizes how thoroughly Yahweh removed the insects from the land. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that emphasizes thoroughness or complete lack of the swarm. Alternate translation: “There was not a single one of these insects left in the whole land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||||
8:32 sb5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וַיַּכְבֵּ֤ד פַּרְעֹה֙ אֶת־לִבּ֔וֹ 1 Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he made his own **heart heavy**. If the **heart** is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [8:15](../08/15.md). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh determined to be defiant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
9:intro hqw8 0 # Exodus 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n- v. 1-7: Fifth plague (first that does not affect Israelites): disease kills livestock\n- v. 8-12: Sixth plague: boils\n- v. 13-35: Seventh plague: hail\n- v. 27-35: Pharaoh seems to repent, but it does not last\n\n## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n- animals are affected in both the fifth and seventh plagues, in the fifth, the word is specifically related to domestic animals (livestock) while the word used in the seventh is more general
|
||||
9:1 se3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ 1 # General Information:\n\nA new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the beginning of the fifth plague sequence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
9:1 se3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וַיֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ 1 A new scene begins here. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. This is the beginning of the fifth plague sequence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
9:1 p1oj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of [9:4](../09/04.md) and contains two additional levels of quotes. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. There may be other quotations in this chapter; they will be marked by the same punctuation, but they will not have their own notes unless there is something unique about them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
9:1 fo4o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes וְדִבַּרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֗יו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽעִבְרִ֔ים 1 You may want to translate the second-level quotation beginning with **Thus says Yahweh** as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the levels of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “and say to him that Yahweh, the God of the Hebrews, says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||||
9:1 w0lg כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ 1 This quotation formula is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information.
|
||||
|
|
@ -1226,7 +1226,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
16:26 jv77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּבַיּ֧וֹם הַשְּׁבִיעִ֛י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but on day seven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
16:27 qf14 וְלֹ֖א מָצָֽאוּ 1 Alternate translation: “but they did not find any manna”
|
||||
16:28 e1vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion עַד־אָ֨נָה֙ מֵֽאַנְתֶּ֔ם לִשְׁמֹ֥ר מִצְוֺתַ֖י וְתוֹרֹתָֽי 1 God used this question to scold the people because they did not obey his laws. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You people still do not keep my commandments and laws!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
16:28 q41d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd מֵֽאַנְתֶּ֔ם 1 # General Information:\n\nYahweh speaks to Moses, but the word **you** refers to the people of Israel in general. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of “you” in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
|
||||
16:28 q41d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd מֵֽאַנְתֶּ֔ם 1 Yahweh speaks to Moses, but the word **you** refers to the people of Israel in general. If the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms of “you” in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
|
||||
16:28 vnq7 לִשְׁמֹ֥ר מִצְוֺתַ֖י וְתוֹרֹתָֽי 1 Alternate translation: “to obey my commandments and my laws”
|
||||
16:29 p22l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כִּֽי־יְהוָה֮ נָתַ֣ן לָכֶ֣ם הַשַּׁבָּת֒ 1 Yahweh speaks about teaching people to rest on the Sabbath as if the **Sabbath** were a gift. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, have taught you to rest on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
16:29 dt58 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּיּ֥וֹם הַשִּׁשִּׁ֖י & בַּיּ֥וֹם הַשְּׁבִיעִֽי 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “on day 6 … on day 7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1465,7 +1465,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
22:intro f9vb 0 # Exodus 22 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\nThis chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. We will not attempt to provide an outline since almost every verse is about a different case.\n\n## Translation Issues in this Chapter\n\n### Hypothetical situations\n\nThroughout the case law a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if.” Then there is a description of the situation, and then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will contain these hypothetical situations. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]] Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).\n\n### Passive construction\n\nMany portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]].
|
||||
22:1 syx5 0 # General Information:\n\nYahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.
|
||||
22:1 onm0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical כִּ֤י יִגְנֹֽב־אִישׁ֙ שׁ֣וֹר אוֹ־שֶׂ֔ה וּטְבָח֖וֹ א֣וֹ מְכָר֑וֹ 1 # General Information:\n\nThis is the first of many hypothetical situations in this chapter, introduced by “when” or **if,** which you will encounter over the next several chapters. See the [introduction](../22/intro.md). You will need to translate these consistently in a manner that expresses that these situations have not actually happened. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
|
||||
22:1 bc03 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה & וְאַרְבַּע 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation: “5 … and 4” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
|
||||
22:1 bc03 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה & וְאַרְבַּע 1 Alternate translation: “5 … and 4” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
|
||||
22:2 mt43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive אִם־בַּמַּחְתֶּ֛רֶת יִמָּצֵ֥א הַגַּנָּ֖ב 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “If anyone finds a thief while he is breaking in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
22:2 e98x בַּמַּחְתֶּ֛רֶת 1 Alternate translation: “while using force to enter a house”
|
||||
22:2 gt5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְהֻכָּ֣ה וָמֵ֑ת 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if anyone strikes the thief so that he dies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1528,7 +1528,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
23:intro hk5t 0 # Exodus 23 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\nThis chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. It also touches on the patterns of life regarding the Sabbaths ([verses 10-12](../23/10.md)) and Festivals ([verses 14-19](../23/14.md)). At [verse 20](../23/20.md) Yahweh begins telling them about their future as they go to and live in the promised land.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Celebrations of feasts and festivals\n\nThe people of Israel were required to celebrate certain feasts and festivals. These were part of the law of Moses, and some are described in this chapter. Their purpose was to worship Yahweh and to remember the great things Yahweh has done for them.
|
||||
23:1 we1y 0 # General Information:\n\nYahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel.
|
||||
23:1 eeoc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֖א שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **report** and **emptiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “You must not report emptily” or “You must not report falsely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
23:1 l4xr שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation: “a false testimony”
|
||||
23:1 l4xr שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא 1 Alternate translation: “a false testimony”
|
||||
23:1 fu5k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אַל־תָּ֤שֶׁת יָֽדְךָ֙ עִם־רָשָׁ֔ע 1 Here, to **put your hand with the wicked** means to support the lies that he is telling in order to harm someone else. The image is of putting out your hand to help him, to make him stronger than he would be on his own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You must not assist the wicked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
23:1 y1a3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy עֵ֥ד חָמָֽס 1 Here, **violence** can also mean “wrong.” Either way, it means to harm another person by committing injustice (violence to justice) by lying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a false witness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
23:2 nqz9 וְלֹא־תַעֲנֶ֣ה 1 Alternate translation: “and you also must not speak”
|
||||
|
|
@ -1651,8 +1651,8 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
25:10 saf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction וָחֵ֜צִי & וָחֵ֨צִי֙ & וָחֵ֖צִי 1 A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
|
||||
25:12 wbq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְיָצַ֣קְתָּ לּ֗וֹ אַרְבַּע֙ טַבְּעֹ֣ת זָהָ֔ב 1 Casting rings was a process in which gold was melted, poured into a mold that was in the shape of a ring, and then allowed to cool and harden. If this sort of metal-working process is unknown to your people, you may simply describe it, or use a word meaning “make,” as the UST does. The UST approach is preferred, as the creation process is not in focus here, and it would be cumbersome to include the description in the text. You could use a word meaning “make,” and include the description in a footnote if you are including those and your team feels it is important to understand. Alternate translation: “You shall make four rings of gold by melting the gold and pouring it into molds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
25:13 i5mc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שִׁטִּ֑ים 1 A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. See how you translated this in [25:5](../25/05.md). [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
25:15 k67p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism בְּטַבְּעֹת֙ הָאָרֹ֔ן יִהְי֖וּ הַבַּדִּ֑ים לֹ֥א יָסֻ֖רוּ מִמֶּֽנּוּ 1 # General Information:\n\nThese two phrases mean similar things. Yahweh is saying the same thing in two different ways to emphasize how important this command is. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The poles belong in the rings of the box; no one is ever to remove them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
25:15 aea1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive בְּטַבְּעֹת֙ הָאָרֹ֔ן יִהְי֖וּ הַבַּדִּ֑ים לֹ֥א יָסֻ֖רוּ מִמֶּֽנּוּ 1 # General Information:\n\nIf your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as seen in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
25:15 k67p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism בְּטַבְּעֹת֙ הָאָרֹ֔ן יִהְי֖וּ הַבַּדִּ֑ים לֹ֥א יָסֻ֖רוּ מִמֶּֽנּוּ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. Yahweh is saying the same thing in two different ways to emphasize how important this command is. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “The poles belong in the rings of the box; no one is ever to remove them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
25:15 aea1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive בְּטַבְּעֹת֙ הָאָרֹ֔ן יִהְי֖וּ הַבַּדִּ֑ים לֹ֥א יָסֻ֖רוּ מִמֶּֽנּוּ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as seen in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
25:17 ast8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance אַמָּתַ֤יִם וָחֵ֨צִי֙ & וְאַמָּ֥ה וָחֵ֖צִי 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to the metric system is: 115 centimeters … 69 centimeters … 69 centimeters (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
|
||||
25:17 c8o7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction וָחֵ֨צִי֙ & וָחֵ֖צִי 1 A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
|
||||
25:19 b4l9 מִן־הַכַּפֹּ֛רֶת תַּעֲשׂ֥וּ אֶת־הַכְּרֻבִ֖ים עַל־שְׁנֵ֥י קְצוֹתָֽיו 1 This seems to indicate that the cherubim should be formed out of the same piece of gold as the rest of the lid. It may, however, mean that at the end they should be one piece, so the gold should be heated to melting and the lid and cherubim joined together. Alternate translation: “You shall join the cherubim to the atonement lid on its two ends”
|
||||
|
|
@ -1722,7 +1722,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
26:29 ji1j בָּתִּ֖ים לַבְּרִיחִ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “which will hold the crossbars” or “because they will hold the crossbars”
|
||||
26:29 nq3m לַבְּרִיחִ֑ם 1 The **crossbars** are horizontal support beams that give stability to the structure. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:26](../26/26.md).
|
||||
26:30 csf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הָרְאֵ֖יתָ בָּהָֽר 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
26:31 yqi6 0 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md).
|
||||
26:31 yqi6 0 See how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md).
|
||||
26:33 p2yq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַקְּרָסִים֒ 1 The **clasps** fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated these in [Exodus 26:6](../26/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
26:33 x28l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ הַקֳּדָשִֽׁים 1 Here, **Holy of Holies** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this place would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. Alternate translation: “the Most Holy Place” or “the Extraordinarily Holy Place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||||
26:34 u3tu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession בְּקֹ֖דֶשׁ הַקֳּדָשִֽׁים 1 Here, **Holy of Holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy places. If this form would not express that this place would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “in the Most Holy Place” or “in the Extraordinarily Holy Place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1798,7 +1798,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
28:15 sf8e מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה חֹשֵׁ֔ב כְּמַעֲשֵׂ֥ה אֵפֹ֖ד תַּעֲשֶׂ֑נּוּ 1 Alternate translation: “a skillful workman will make it like the ephod”
|
||||
28:16 cny4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance זֶ֥רֶת & וְזֶ֥רֶת 1 You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A span is approximately 23 centimeters. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
|
||||
28:16 onj6 רָב֥וּעַ יִֽהְיֶ֖ה כָּפ֑וּל 1 Alternate translation: “Fold it in half so it will be square”
|
||||
28:17 spd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown 0 # General Information:\n\nTwelve kinds of stones are listed in the next four verses. Scholars are not sure which kinds of stones the Hebrew words refer to. Some translations list different stones. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
28:17-21 spd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown 0 Twelve kinds of stones are listed in the next four verses. Scholars are not sure which kinds of stones the Hebrew words refer to. Some translations list different stones. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
28:17 n1ys rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown אֹ֤דֶם פִּטְדָה֙ וּבָרֶ֔קֶת 1 These are precious stones. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
28:18 qq9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וְהַטּ֖וּר הַשֵּׁנִ֑י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “And row 2:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
28:18 ga1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown נֹ֥פֶךְ סַפִּ֖יר וְיָהֲלֹֽם 1 These are precious stones. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1909,15 +1909,15 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
29:31 u9kl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּמָקֹ֥ם קָדֹֽשׁ 1 This is not the same as the Holy Place outside of the Most Holy Place. This probably refers to a place within the courtyard. However, its exact location is not otherwise specified. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the entrance to the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
29:33 mcdc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לְמַלֵּ֥א אֶת־יָדָ֖ם 1 This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “to ordain them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
29:34 rhp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive לֹ֥א יֵאָכֵ֖ל 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one may eat it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
29:35 yo59 כָּ֔כָה 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **thus** means “like this” and, as the next verses make clear, refers to the sacrificial ceremony outlined in this chapter which they must repeat seven times.
|
||||
29:35 wrfs rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֥ת 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
|
||||
29:35 c2si rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom תְּמַלֵּ֥א יָדָֽם 1 # General Information:\n\nThis seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “you shall ordain them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
29:36 r5tx 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse and the next explain the purpose of the sacrifice detailed in [verses 10-14](../29/10.md).
|
||||
29:36 s81n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal וּפַ֨ר חַטָּ֜את תַּעֲשֶׂ֤ה לַיּוֹם֙ עַל־הַכִּפֻּרִ֔ים וְחִטֵּאתָ֙ עַל־הַמִּזְבֵּ֔חַ בְּכַפֶּרְךָ֖ עָלָ֑יו 1 # General Information:\n\nThe phrase **and you shall purify the altar by making atonement for it** describes the purpose of offering the bull. You may want to use a stronger connector. In languages that need to put purpose first, you may need to re-order the clauses. Alternate translation: “And you shall offer a bull of purification for atonement daily, thus you shall purify the altar, by making atonement for it.” or “You shall purify the altar by making atonement for it: you shall offer a bull of purification daily for its atonement.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
|
||||
29:35 yo59 כָּ֔כָה 1 Here, **thus** means “like this” and, as the next verses make clear, refers to the sacrificial ceremony outlined in this chapter which they must repeat seven times.
|
||||
29:35 wrfs rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֥ת 1 Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
|
||||
29:35 c2si rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom תְּמַלֵּ֥א יָדָֽם 1 This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “you shall ordain them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
29:36-37 r5tx 0 This verse and the next explain the purpose of the sacrifice detailed in [verses 10-14](../29/10.md).
|
||||
29:36 s81n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal וּפַ֨ר חַטָּ֜את תַּעֲשֶׂ֤ה לַיּוֹם֙ עַל־הַכִּפֻּרִ֔ים וְחִטֵּאתָ֙ עַל־הַמִּזְבֵּ֔חַ בְּכַפֶּרְךָ֖ עָלָ֑יו 1 The phrase **and you shall purify the altar by making atonement for it** describes the purpose of offering the bull. You may want to use a stronger connector. In languages that need to put purpose first, you may need to re-order the clauses. Alternate translation: “And you shall offer a bull of purification for atonement daily, thus you shall purify the altar, by making atonement for it.” or “You shall purify the altar by making atonement for it: you shall offer a bull of purification daily for its atonement.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
|
||||
29:37 pq5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֔ים 1 Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||||
29:37 qk5h יִקְדָּֽשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “will also become set apart”
|
||||
29:38 e4r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּנֵֽי־שָׁנָ֛ה 1 # General Information:\n\nThe phrase **sons of a year** is an idiom meaning one year old. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
29:39 qxst rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בֵּ֥ין הָעַרְבָּֽיִם 1 # General Information:\n\nThe exact meaning of this phrase is debated. Since the priests ate many of the sacrifices, it may have been offered around the time of the evening meal. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
29:38 e4r9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּנֵֽי־שָׁנָ֛ה 1 The phrase **sons of a year** is an idiom meaning one year old. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
29:39 qxst rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בֵּ֥ין הָעַרְבָּֽיִם 1 The exact meaning of this phrase is debated. Since the priests ate many of the sacrifices, it may have been offered around the time of the evening meal. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
29:40 x6i4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction וְעִשָּׂרֹ֨ן & רֶ֣בַע & רְבִעִ֥ית 1 A **tenth** means one part out of ten equal parts. A **fourth** means one part out of four equal parts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
|
||||
29:40 nd8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְעִשָּׂרֹ֨ן סֹ֜לֶת 1 Many commentators suggest that this means one tenth of an “ephah” even though “ephah” is not written. If your translation style retains the original measurement words, you may need to insert the word you are using for “ephah” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
29:40 oxsl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume וְעִשָּׂרֹ֨ן סֹ֜לֶת & רֶ֣בַע הַהִ֔ין & רְבִעִ֥ית הַהִ֖ין 1 The values given in the UST are approximations as the exact size of an ephah and a hin is not precisely known. An ephah (the implied measurement) may have been around 22 liters, so this is about 2.2 liters of flour. A hin may have been around 3.7 liters, so this is about one liter of both oil and wine. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1929,13 +1929,13 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
30:1 v8vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual וְעָשִׂ֥יתָ 1 Here, **you** refers to Moses and the people of Israel. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||||
30:2 w56e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown קַרְנֹתָֽיו 1 See how you translated **horns** in [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
30:2 a39m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance אַמָּ֨ה & וְאַמָּ֤ה & וְאַמָּתַ֖יִם 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46cm … 46cm … 94cm (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
|
||||
30:3 d3uu 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md), so see how you translated there.
|
||||
30:3 d3uu 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md), so see how you translated there.
|
||||
30:4 qyg4 to be attached to it 0 When translating this verse, you may want to refer back to several other passages regarding making rings for carrying poles. See [Exo 25:12](../25/12.md), [Exo 25:26](../25/26.md), [Exo 25:27](../25/27.md), & [Exo 27:4](../27/04.md).
|
||||
30:4 bvxi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לְבָתִּ֣ים 1 Here, the word **housings** means that the rings will hold the poles. Since they are where the poles belong for use, they are their house. If you have a similar idiom meaning “place of belonging,” you may use it or you may translate the idea. Alternate translation: “a place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
30:6 ulvn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֣י & לִפְנֵ֣י 1 Here, **before the face of** means in front of. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
30:6 e87s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular לְךָ֖ 1 Here, **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||||
30:7 o1zo בַּבֹּ֣קֶר בַּבֹּ֗קֶר 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation: “Each morning” or “Daily, in the morning”
|
||||
30:7 l2rl בְּהֵיטִיב֛וֹ אֶת־הַנֵּרֹ֖ת 1 # General Information:\n\nThe lamps had burned overnight and weren’t needed during the day, so he would put them out and do whatever maintenance was required for them to be ready to burn again in the evening. Alternate translation: “trims the lamps”
|
||||
30:7 o1zo בַּבֹּ֣קֶר בַּבֹּ֗קֶר 1 Alternate translation: “Each morning” or “Daily, in the morning”
|
||||
30:7 l2rl בְּהֵיטִיב֛וֹ אֶת־הַנֵּרֹ֖ת 1 The lamps had burned overnight and weren’t needed during the day, so he would put them out and do whatever maintenance was required for them to be ready to burn again in the evening. Alternate translation: “trims the lamps”
|
||||
30:8 nrgk וּבְהַעֲלֹ֨ת אַהֲרֹ֧ן אֶת־הַנֵּרֹ֛ת 1 This may indicate that in the morning Aaron had taken the lamps down, and he would light them and then put them up on the holders in the evening.
|
||||
30:8 sq7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בֵּ֥ין הָעֲרְבַּ֖יִם 1 The exact meaning of this phrase is debated. See how you translated it in [29:39](../29/39.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
30:8 qm7i לְדֹרֹתֵיכֶֽם 1 Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md).
|
||||
|
|
@ -1987,7 +1987,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
30:32 it0x rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result קֹ֣דֶשׁ ה֔וּא קֹ֖דֶשׁ יִהְיֶ֥ה לָכֶֽם 1 The second half of this statement (**it shall be holy to you**) explains to the people the result of this oil being holy, which is, they must respect it as a holy thing. It may make more sense in some languages to move this whole statement to the beginning of the verse, because the rule about pouring on someone’s body is an application of the result. Alternate translation (placed at the beginning of the verse): “Because it is sacred, you must treat it like it is sacred, therefore” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
30:33 pa53 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְנִכְרַ֖ת מֵעַמָּֽיו 1 See how you translated **cut off** in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
30:33 yhgi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וְנִכְרַ֖ת מֵעַמָּֽיו 1 See how you translated **cut off** in [12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
30:34 uo57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown נָטָ֤ף׀ וּשְׁחֵ֨לֶת֙ וְחֶלְבְּנָ֔ה 1 # General Information:\n\nHere is a brief description of these materials, though we really do not know exactly what they are: **stacte** is a resin from certain gum plants, **onycha** is from certain shellfish or mollusks, and **galbanum** is another kind of gum resin. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
30:34 uo57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown נָטָ֤ף׀ וּשְׁחֵ֨לֶת֙ וְחֶלְבְּנָ֔ה 1 Here is a brief description of these materials, though we really do not know exactly what they are: **stacte** is a resin from certain gum plants, **onycha** is from certain shellfish or mollusks, and **galbanum** is another kind of gum resin. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
30:35 y8yj וְעָשִׂ֤יתָ אֹתָהּ֙ קְטֹ֔רֶת רֹ֖קַח מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה רוֹקֵ֑חַ 1 This could mean: (1) Moses was to have a perfumer do the work or (2) Moses was to do the work himself the way a perfumer would do it. See how you translated these words in [Exodus 30:25](../30/25.md).
|
||||
30:36 nz2a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you וְשָֽׁחַקְתָּ֣ & וְנָתַתָּ֨ה 1 Here, **you** probably refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||||
30:36 oj2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֤י 1 Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -2110,8 +2110,8 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
32:35 wv1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָעֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן 1 The people are being spoken of as having made the calf themselves (along with Aaron) because they demanded it and gave their gold for it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they were guilty along with Aaron of making the calf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
32:35 h3kl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וַיִּגֹּ֥ף יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־הָעָ֑ם עַ֚ל אֲשֶׁ֣ר עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָעֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “And because they had made the calf (that Aaron made), Yahweh plagued the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
33:intro g5k3 0 # Exodus 33 General Notes\n\nThis chapter is largely about Moses continuing to negotiate for a closer relationship between Yahweh and himself and Yahweh and the people. There are a number of important theological issues addressed, especially Yahweh’s holiness and character. Several key terms appear.\n\n## Structure:\n\n- v. 1-6: Moses negotiating with Yahweh to go with Israel\n- v. 7-11: the temporary tent of meeting\n- v. 12-23: Moses negotiating with Yahweh to see his glory\n\n## Potential Translation Issues\n\nYahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4, so in some languages you may need to reverse them.\n\nVerses 7-11 seem to be background, general information about a somewhat unspecified time period. Be sure this is clear in how you structure these verses. See the beginning of verse 7 in the UST. While the term in verses 7-11 is often used interchangeably with the Dwelling that will be built in chapters 35-39, it is a temporary and different tent. One distinguishing feature is that it is well outside the camp, while the Dwelling will be in the center of the camp.\n\nThe word **tent** in verses 7-11 refers either to this temporary “tent of meeting” that Moses set up or to the tents that the Israelites lived in. Pay attention throughout these verses to which tent is referred to.
|
||||
33:1 p8xp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes לֵאמֹ֔ר לְזַרְעֲךָ֖ אֶתְּנֶֽנָּה 1 # General Information:\n\nThe words which follow **saying** are a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||||
33:2 tlen וְשָׁלַחְתִּ֥י לְפָנֶ֖יךָ מַלְאָ֑ךְ וְגֵֽרַשְׁתִּ֗י אֶת־הַֽכְּנַעֲנִי֙ הָֽאֱמֹרִ֔י וְהַֽחִתִּי֙ וְהַפְּרִזִּ֔י הַחִוִּ֖י וְהַיְבוּסִֽי 1 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated these in [Exodus 23:20](../23/20.md) and [23:23](../23/23.md).
|
||||
33:1 p8xp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes לֵאמֹ֔ר לְזַרְעֲךָ֖ אֶתְּנֶֽנָּה 1 The words which follow **saying** are a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||||
33:2 tlen וְשָׁלַחְתִּ֥י לְפָנֶ֖יךָ מַלְאָ֑ךְ וְגֵֽרַשְׁתִּ֗י אֶת־הַֽכְּנַעֲנִי֙ הָֽאֱמֹרִ֔י וְהַֽחִתִּי֙ וְהַפְּרִזִּ֔י הַחִוִּ֖י וְהַיְבוּסִֽי 1 See how you translated these in [Exodus 23:20](../23/20.md) and [23:23](../23/23.md).
|
||||
33:3 yyt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב וּדְבָ֑שׁ 1 Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. See how you translated this in [Exodus 3:8](../03/08.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
33:3 y347 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּדְבָ֑שׁ 1 God spoke of the land being good for animals and plants as if the milk and honey from those animals and plants were flowing through the land. See how you translated this in [Exodus 3:8](../03/08.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
33:3 ah5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor קְשֵׁה־עֹ֨רֶף֙ 1 Yahweh speaks of the people being rebellious as if they had **hard necks**. See how you translated this in [Exodus 32:9](../32/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -2161,7 +2161,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
33:16 u82a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּעֵינֶ֨יךָ֙ 1 Here, **found favor** is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun **favor** into another form. Finally, **eyes** are a metonym for sight, and sight is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase **you have found favor in my eyes** in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
33:17 chua rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result גַּ֣ם אֶת־הַדָּבָ֥ר הַזֶּ֛ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר דִּבַּ֖רְתָּ אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֑ה כִּֽי־מָצָ֤אתָ חֵן֙ בְּעֵינַ֔י וָאֵדָעֲךָ֖ בְּשֵֽׁם 1 Here, **for** signals a reason clause. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because you have found favor in my eyes, and I know you by name, I will also do this thing that you have spoken” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
33:17 ln7y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom מָצָ֤אתָ חֵן֙ בְּעֵינַ֔י 1 Here, **you have found favor in my eyes** is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun **favor** into another form. Finally, **eyes** are a metonym for sight, and sight is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase **you have found favor in my eyes** in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
33:17 aln2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular מָצָ֤אתָ 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **you** is singular and refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||||
33:17 aln2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular מָצָ֤אתָ 1 Here, **you** is singular and refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||||
33:17 u2nv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וָאֵדָעֲךָ֖ בְּשֵֽׁם 1 To know someone by name is to know them well. See how you translated this in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md). Alternate translation: “and I know you well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
33:18 w73v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns כְּבֹדֶֽךָ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea in another way. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
33:19 sx1a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor אֲנִ֨י אַעֲבִ֤יר כָּל־טוּבִי֙ עַל־פָּנֶ֔יךָ 1 Yahweh speaks of his **goodness** like it was an object that he could move over Moses. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -2217,12 +2217,12 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
34:10 s7uz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual עִמָּֽךְ 1 Here, **you** refers to Moses and the people of Israel. If your language makes a distinction, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||||
34:11 xtkf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy גֹרֵ֣שׁ מִפָּנֶ֗יךָ 1 Here, **from before your faces** means “ahead of you” or “on your behalf.” Yahweh is emphasizing who is doing the driving out. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
34:11 kfix rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֶת־הָאֱמֹרִי֙ וְהַֽכְּנַעֲנִ֔י וְהַחִתִּי֙ וְהַפְּרִזִּ֔י וְהַחִוִּ֖י וְהַיְבוּסִֽי 1 See how you translated these in [Exodus 33:2](../33/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
34:12 fmc9 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses 12-16 are the first of these ten commandments. The original language is structured such that every clause in these verses is subordinate to the initial, **Guard yourself**. That sort of structure may not be possible in your language (as it is not in English).
|
||||
34:12 mnpv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns לְךָ֗ 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **yourself** means that each Israelite should guard against committing these sins. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||||
34:12 n1il rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָאָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר אַתָּ֖ה בָּ֣א עָלֶ֑יהָ פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְמוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּקִרְבֶּֽךָ 1 # General Information:\n\nThis sentence contains two hypotheticals as a warning. Each is introduced by **lest**. Use a marker in your language that introduces a hypothetical situation, but also see the next note. Alternate translation: “If you were to cut a covenant with the inhabitant of the land where you are about to go into, probably he would become as a trap in your midst.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
|
||||
34:12 t1hz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָאָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר אַתָּ֖ה בָּ֣א עָלֶ֑יהָ פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְמוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּקִרְבֶּֽךָ 1 # General Information:\n\nThe second of these hypothetical statements is logically dependent on and follows after the first as a result. As you mark these hypotheticals, use a form that communicates that the second is a result of the first. Alternate translation: “because if you cut a covenant with the inhabitant of the land where you are about to go into, then he will become as a trap in your midst” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
|
||||
34:12 b459 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ 1 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated this in [34:10](../34/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
34:12 tnka rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב & יִהְיֶ֥ה 1 # General Information:\n\nThe word **inhabitant** is a singular noun that refers to any individual inhabitant or group of inhabitants from the peoples mentioned in the previous verse. The pronoun **he** is agreeing with that singular noun. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “with the inhabitants of … they become” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
|
||||
34:12-16 fmc9 0 Verses 12-16 are the first of these ten commandments. The original language is structured such that every clause in these verses is subordinate to the initial, **Guard yourself**. That sort of structure may not be possible in your language (as it is not in English).
|
||||
34:12 mnpv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns לְךָ֗ 1 Here, **yourself** means that each Israelite should guard against committing these sins. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||||
34:12 n1il rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָאָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר אַתָּ֖ה בָּ֣א עָלֶ֑יהָ פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְמוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּקִרְבֶּֽךָ 1 This sentence contains two hypotheticals as a warning. Each is introduced by **lest**. Use a marker in your language that introduces a hypothetical situation, but also see the next note. Alternate translation: “If you were to cut a covenant with the inhabitant of the land where you are about to go into, probably he would become as a trap in your midst.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
|
||||
34:12 t1hz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָאָ֔רֶץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר אַתָּ֖ה בָּ֣א עָלֶ֑יהָ פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְמוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּקִרְבֶּֽךָ 1 The second of these hypothetical statements is logically dependent on and follows after the first as a result. As you mark these hypotheticals, use a form that communicates that the second is a result of the first. Alternate translation: “because if you cut a covenant with the inhabitant of the land where you are about to go into, then he will become as a trap in your midst” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
|
||||
34:12 b459 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ 1 See how you translated this in [34:10](../34/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
34:12 tnka rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב & יִהְיֶ֥ה 1 The word **inhabitant** is a singular noun that refers to any individual inhabitant or group of inhabitants from the peoples mentioned in the previous verse. The pronoun **he** is agreeing with that singular noun. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “with the inhabitants of … they become” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
|
||||
34:12 lxz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְמוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּקִרְבֶּֽךָ 1 People who tempt others to sin are spoken of as if they were a **trap.** If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “lest those remaining people tempt you to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
|
||||
34:13 wkbx rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast כִּ֤י 1 This word marks a strong contrast with the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a strong contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a new sentence: “Do the opposite!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
|
||||
34:13 tfd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure אֶת־מִזְבְּחֹתָם֙ תִּתֹּצ֔וּן וְאֶת־מַצֵּבֹתָ֖ם תְּשַׁבֵּר֑וּן וְאֶת־אֲשֵׁרָ֖יו תִּכְרֹתֽוּן 1 This unusual word order reflects the original in bringing each item the Israelites must destroy into focus. You should use whatever form in your language would emphasize or focus on each item that they must destroy. Alternate translation, as separate sentences: “as for their altars, break them down! As for their stone pillars, smash them to pieces! As for their trees where they worship the goddess Asherah, cut them all down!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -2230,7 +2230,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
34:14 fzjz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction לֹ֥א תִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶ֖ה 1 To **bow to another god** means to worship it. This imagery is throughout scripture and should be retained in translation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you shall not bow to worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||||
34:14 vmx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor כִּ֤י יְהוָה֙ קַנָּ֣א שְׁמ֔וֹ אֵ֥ל קַנָּ֖א הֽוּא׃ 1 The repeated word **jealous** means that God is concerned to keep his honor. If his people worship other gods, he loses honor, because when his people do not honor him, other people also will not honor him. This is pictured in a metaphor of a jealous spouse who is concerned that his spouse be faithful to him. This is an important Biblical metaphor that should be kept in translation if at all possible. The UST makes this image explicit as a simile, which can be done occasionally but would probably be too long for repeated use in a translation. Alternate translation: “Yahweh jealously guards his reputation. He is a God jealous of his honor.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
34:14 s5sd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy כִּ֤י יְהוָה֙ קַנָּ֣א שְׁמ֔וֹ 1 Here, the word **name** represents God’s character. Alternate translation: “Yahweh is always jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
34:15 r70f rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב & וְקָרָ֣א & מִזִּבְחֽוֹ 1 # General Information:\n\nThe word **inhabitant** is a singular noun that refers to any individual inhabitant or group of inhabitants from the peoples mentioned in the previous verse. The pronouns **he** and **his** are agreeing with that singular noun. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. See how you translated this in [verse 12](../34/12.md). Alternate translation: “with the inhabitants of … and they invite … from their sacrifice” or “with the inhabitants of … and one of them invites … from his sacrifice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
|
||||
34:15 r70f rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב & וְקָרָ֣א & מִזִּבְחֽוֹ 1 The word **inhabitant** is a singular noun that refers to any individual inhabitant or group of inhabitants from the peoples mentioned in the previous verse. The pronouns **he** and **his** are agreeing with that singular noun. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. See how you translated this in [verse 12](../34/12.md). Alternate translation: “with the inhabitants of … and they invite … from their sacrifice” or “with the inhabitants of … and one of them invites … from his sacrifice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
|
||||
34:15 udz0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֥ת בְּרִ֖ית לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָאָ֑רֶץ וְזָנ֣וּ׀ אַחֲרֵ֣י אֱלֹֽהֵיהֶ֗ם וְזָבְחוּ֙ לֵאלֹ֣הֵיהֶ֔ם וְקָרָ֣א לְךָ֔ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nMost of this verse is a sort of chain of logically consecutive hypothetical events that Yahweh is warning the Israelites against. Your language may have a specific way this sort of argument must be structured or phrased. One way to see this would be to repeat **lest** before every verb in verse 15-16. Alternate translation: “If you cut a covenant the inhabitant of the land, and if they then prostitute after their gods and sacrifice to their gods, and if he then invites you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
|
||||
34:15 f1e3 פֶּן־תִּכְרֹ֥ת בְּרִ֖ית לְיוֹשֵׁ֣ב הָאָ֑רֶץ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis phrase is exactly the same as the second clause of [verse 12](../34/12.md). It serves as a reminder of the command Yahweh is giving as he begins to expand on the “trap” he mentioned in verse 12. Your language may need to mark this repetition in a particular way. Alternate translation: “Remember: keep yourself lest you cut a covenant with the inhabitant of the land”
|
||||
34:15 n4nt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom תִּכְרֹ֥ת בְּרִ֖ית 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nSee how you translated this in [verse 12](../34/12.md). Alternate translation: “you make a covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -2246,24 +2246,24 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
34:16 p98a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וְהִזְנוּ֙ אֶת־בָּנֶ֔יךָ אַחֲרֵ֖י אֱלֹהֵיהֶֽן 1 This is the climatic consequence of living in peace the nations God is driving out before them: complete apostacy from Yahweh and loss of the next generation to wickedness. Specifically it is the result of intermarriage with the pagans, which God has explicitly forbidden for this very reason. If your language marks the final consequence of a string of actions in a particular way it may be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “and in the end, they will cause even your sons to prostitute after their gods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
34:17 lgab you will eat some of his sacrifice 0 The prohibition here is focused on making gods. In your translation make sure that the focus is not on the method, but the god-making.
|
||||
34:17 rux0 מַסֵּכָ֖ה 1 See how you translated **molten metal** in [Exodus 32:4](../32/04.md).
|
||||
34:18 s1rr 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to most of [Exodus 23:15](../23/15.md).
|
||||
34:18 s1rr 0 This verse is almost identical to most of [Exodus 23:15](../23/15.md).
|
||||
34:18 u5be rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֨ת 1 Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
|
||||
34:18 i5ck rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths הָאָבִ֑יב & הָֽאָבִ֔יב 1 This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. **Aviv** is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated **Aviv** in [Exodus 13:4](../13/04.md). You could convert the Hebrew day and month into an approximate date on the calendar that your culture uses. However, the Jews used a lunar calendar, so if you use a solar calendar, the date will be different every year and the translation will not be entirely accurate. So you may just want to give the number of the day and the name of the month on the Hebrew calendar, and say approximately what time of year that is on your calendar in a footnote.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]])
|
||||
34:19 ly7d 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 13:12](../13/12.md).
|
||||
34:19 ly7d 0 This verse is similar to [Exodus 13:12](../13/12.md).
|
||||
34:20 sbrs buy back 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 13:13](../13/13.md).
|
||||
34:20 j4tv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְשֶׂ֔ה & וַעֲרַפְתּ֑וֹ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express explicitly that either the **lamb** or **donkey** must be killed, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
34:20 c5ow לֹ֥א תִפְדֶּ֖ה 1 Alternate translation: “you do not ransom the donkey”
|
||||
34:20 yz8x כֹּ֣ל בְּכ֤וֹר בָּנֶ֨יךָ֙ תִּפְדֶּ֔ה 1 Firstborn sons and firstborn donkeys belonged to Yahweh, but Yahweh did not want them sacrificed to Him. Instead, the Israelites were to sacrifice a lamb in their place. This allowed the Israelites to buy the donkeys and sons back from Yahweh.
|
||||
34:20 u2p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives וְלֹֽא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖י רֵיקָֽם 1 Here understatement is used to emphasize that the Israelites must bring a suitable offering to Yahweh. This portion of the verse is identical to the end of [Exodus 23:15](../23/15.md). If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “come to me without a proper offering” or “always bring an offering to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||||
34:21 w9ed 0 # General Information:\n\nThis command is similar to that in [Exodus 20:9](../20/09.md).
|
||||
34:21 n2ka rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּבַיּ֥וֹם הַשְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 # General Information:\n\nIf your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but on day seven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
34:21 w9ed 0 This command is similar to that in [Exodus 20:9](../20/09.md).
|
||||
34:21 n2ka rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּבַיּ֥וֹם הַשְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but on day seven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
34:21 swm8 בֶּחָרִ֥ישׁ וּבַקָּצִ֖יר 1 Alternate translation: “Even when you are preparing the soil or gathering the crops”
|
||||
34:22 lhxb Festival of Ingathering 0 This verse is similar to [Exodus 23:16](../23/16.md), however the first festival is named **Festival of Weeks** here and “Festival of the Harvest” in 23:16.
|
||||
34:22 d13l וְחַג֙ הָֽאָסִ֔יף 1 This festival celebrated the final harvesting of all the crops for the year. This festival was also known as the Festival of Shelters or the Festival of Booths. The idea came from the practice of the farmers living in temporary booths, or huts, out in the fields to guard the crop as it ripened. See Deuteronomy 16:13. See how you translated this in [Exodus 23:16](../23/16.md). Alternate translation: “and the Festival of the Ingathering”
|
||||
34:22 xqy4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor תְּקוּפַ֖ת הַשָּׁנָֽה 1 Like “the exiting of the year” in [Exodus 23:16](../23/16.md), this refers to the end of the year. Here, the year is pictured as something that can turn. Which, thinking of the planet, is highly astronomically accurate. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
34:23 zh58 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for **God of Israel** and dropping “to,” this verse is identical to [Exodus 23:17](../23/17.md).
|
||||
34:23 iagy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יֵרָאֶה֙ & אֶת־פְּנֵ֛י הָֽאָדֹ֥ן 1 # General Information:\n\nHere to **appear before the face of the Lord Yahweh** means to gather to worship. **Before the face** is a metonym for Yahweh’s presence, referring to worship. Alternate translation: “must come to worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
34:25 zx2v 0 # General Information:\n\nSee the very similar [Exodus 23:18](../23/18.md).
|
||||
34:23 zh58 0 Except for **God of Israel** and dropping “to,” this verse is identical to [Exodus 23:17](../23/17.md).
|
||||
34:23 iagy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יֵרָאֶה֙ & אֶת־פְּנֵ֛י הָֽאָדֹ֥ן 1 Here to **appear before the face of the Lord Yahweh** means to gather to worship. **Before the face** is a metonym for Yahweh’s presence, referring to worship. Alternate translation: “must come to worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
34:25 zx2v 0 See the very similar [Exodus 23:18](../23/18.md).
|
||||
34:25 e8v2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit דַּם־זִבְחִ֑י 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the fact that the blood is from an animal explicitly. Alternate translation: “the blood of an animal that you sacrifice to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
34:26 bv0a the blood of my sacrifice 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 23:19](../23/19.md).
|
||||
34:27 x6j9 כִּ֞י עַל־פִּ֣י׀ הַדְּבָרִ֣ים הָאֵ֗לֶּה 1 Alternate translation: “for in accordance with these words” or “for according to these words”
|
||||
|
|
@ -2285,25 +2285,25 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
35:2 c559 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal וּבַיּ֣וֹם הַשְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “but on day 7” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
35:2 ax6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive שֵׁ֣שֶׁת יָמִים֮ תֵּעָשֶׂ֣ה מְלָאכָה֒ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Six days you shall work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
35:2 zij9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive כָּל־הָעֹשֶׂ֥ה ב֛וֹ מְלָאכָ֖ה יוּמָֽת 1 If your language would not use passive here, you could state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “You must execute anyone who works on that day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
35:4 jdb8 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 4-9, Moses tells the Israelites to collect the things Yahweh commanded him to collect in [Exodus 25:2-7](../25/02.md). You should check your translation for consistency between these passages.
|
||||
35:4 ugn4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַיֹּ֣אמֶר מֹשֶׁ֔ה אֶל־כָּל־עֲדַ֥ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֵאמֹ֑ר זֶ֣ה הַדָּבָ֔ר אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֥ה יְהוָ֖ה לֵאמֹֽר 1 # General Information:\n\nVerses 5-19 are a second-level direct quotation. If it would be better to reduce the quotation level in your language, you may want to make this introductory comment (everything after the first **saying**) an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And Moses told all of the congregation of the sons of Israel the things that Yahweh commanded, saying,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||||
35:5 h5c8 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 25:2-3](../25/02.md).
|
||||
35:4-9 jdb8 0 In verses 4-9, Moses tells the Israelites to collect the things Yahweh commanded him to collect in [Exodus 25:2-7](../25/02.md). You should check your translation for consistency between these passages.
|
||||
35:5-19 ugn4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations וַיֹּ֣אמֶר מֹשֶׁ֔ה אֶל־כָּל־עֲדַ֥ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֵאמֹ֑ר זֶ֣ה הַדָּבָ֔ר אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֥ה יְהוָ֖ה לֵאמֹֽר 1 Verses 5-19 are a second-level direct quotation. If it would be better to reduce the quotation level in your language, you may want to make this introductory comment (everything after the first **saying**) an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And Moses told all of the congregation of the sons of Israel the things that Yahweh commanded, saying,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||||
35:5 h5c8 0 This verse is similar to [Exodus 25:2-3](../25/02.md).
|
||||
35:5 n2c8 קְח֨וּ מֵֽאִתְּכֶ֤ם תְּרוּמָה֙ לַֽיהוָ֔ה 1 Alternate translation: “Take up a collection for Yahweh from what you have”
|
||||
35:5 qq0a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis כֹּ֚ל 1 Here, “from” is omitted but suggested by the sentence grammar. Also, **every** means “every person.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “from every person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
35:5 pqa2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כֹּ֚ל נְדִ֣יב לִבּ֔וֹ 1 # General Information:\n\nThis is an idiom that indicates a person’s desire to give an offering. Many languages will have a similar idiom, though the body part often varies. Alternate translation: “from everyone who wants to give one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
35:5 gx87 0 # General Information:\n\nAfter this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list.
|
||||
35:6 r12v 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md).
|
||||
35:6 g615 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּתְכֵ֧לֶת וְאַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְתוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 # General Information:\n\nThis could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or “thread” may be the best understanding. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
35:6 cad9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְתוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 # General Information:\n\nA bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
35:7 nmv4 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md).
|
||||
35:5 pqa2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כֹּ֚ל נְדִ֣יב לִבּ֔וֹ 1 This is an idiom that indicates a person’s desire to give an offering. Many languages will have a similar idiom, though the body part often varies. Alternate translation: “from everyone who wants to give one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
35:5 gx87 0 After this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list.
|
||||
35:6 r12v 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md).
|
||||
35:6 g615 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּתְכֵ֧לֶת וְאַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְתוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 This could mean: (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or “thread” may be the best understanding. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
35:6 cad9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְתוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
35:7 nmv4 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md).
|
||||
35:7 l5bq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מְאָדָּמִ֛ים 1 When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather), they become reddish. It is not clear if these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
35:7 wmsl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown תְּחָשִׁ֖ים 1 The meaning of this word is not known; it may refer to some water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. [Sea cows on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sirenia) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
35:7 tzrk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown שִׂטִּֽים 1 A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
35:8 ikm4 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for several uses of the word **and**, this verse is identical to [Exodus 25:6](../25/06.md).
|
||||
35:8 y11w rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וּבְשָׂמִים֙ 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **spices** are made from parts of plants that people dry and then grind into a powder to put in oil or food, giving it a particular smell or flavor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
35:9 f1dd 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for an initial **and**, this verse is identical to [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md).
|
||||
35:9 hcs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְאַ֨בְנֵי־שֹׁ֔הַם 1 # General Information:\n\nAn **onyx stone** is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red, or brown. If this stone is unknown to your people, consider translating it by using a word for a familiar stone with a similar pattern, if possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
35:9 kk7z וְאַבְנֵ֖י 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation: “and valuable gems for” or “and treasured gems for”
|
||||
35:8 ikm4 0 Except for several uses of the word **and**, this verse is identical to [Exodus 25:6](../25/06.md).
|
||||
35:8 y11w rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וּבְשָׂמִים֙ 1 Here, **spices** are made from parts of plants that people dry and then grind into a powder to put in oil or food, giving it a particular smell or flavor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
35:9 f1dd 0 Except for an initial **and**, this verse is identical to [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md).
|
||||
35:9 hcs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְאַ֨בְנֵי־שֹׁ֔הַם 1 An **onyx stone** is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red, or brown. If this stone is unknown to your people, consider translating it by using a word for a familiar stone with a similar pattern, if possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
35:9 kk7z וְאַבְנֵ֖י 1 Alternate translation: “and valuable gems for” or “and treasured gems for”
|
||||
35:10 dc4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy וְכָל־חֲכַם־לֵ֖ב 1 Here, **heart** and **spirit** are both referring to things innately possessed by a person, that is, traits of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftsman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:3](../28/03.md). Alternate translation: “And every man with a skill” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
35:10 lkp4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis צִוָּ֖ה 1 Here, some the words that a sentence would need to be complete in some languages are left out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context, as modeled in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
35:10 ugjb Every skilled man 0 After this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list.
|
||||
|
|
@ -2365,7 +2365,7 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
35:35 rcv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִלֵּ֨א אֹתָ֜ם חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב 1 Here, **skill** to create beautiful objects is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. If your readers would not understand what this image means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He has made them very skillful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
35:35 jvtd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב 1 Here, **of heart** refers to possessing something, in this case ability or skill. Some languages will use a different body part for this image. Alternate translation: “with ability” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
36:intro nz4n 0 # Exodus 36 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n\r\n\r\n* v. 1: finish Moses’ instruction\r\n* v. 2-7: craftsmen collect materials from Moses, inform him the people should stop bringing things because they have too much already -v. 8-38: construction of the Dwelling, verse-by-verse quotations marked below\r\n * v. 8-18: quote [Exodus 26:1-11](../26/01.md)\r\n * v. 19-34: quote [Exodus 26:14-29](../26/14.md)\r\n * v. 35-36: quote [26:31-32](../26/31.md)\r\n * v. 37-38: quote [26:36-37](../26/36.md)\n\n## Translation issues\n\n* The first verse of this chapter goes with the last chapter.\n* Most of this chapter exactly quotes chapter 26 with a shift from instruction to past narrative form on the verbs and a few other minor changes; some are Hebrew word order that will be invisible here. Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency.\n* Throughout verses 8-38 the word **he**is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
36:1 ubk2 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is the end of a quotation from Moses that begin in [35:30](../35/30.md). It should be connected as visually as possible to the previous verses, as the chapter break here is poorly placed.
|
||||
36:1 ubk2 0 This verse is the end of a quotation from Moses that begin in [35:30](../35/30.md). It should be connected as visually as possible to the previous verses, as the chapter break here is poorly placed.
|
||||
36:1 ds99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בְצַלְאֵ֨ל וְאָהֳלִיאָ֜ב 1 **Bezalel and Oholiab** are the names of men. See how you translated this in [Exodus 31:2](../31/02.md) and [31:6](../31/06.md) as well as in the end of [chapter 35](../35/30.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
36:1 y1h1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations אִ֣ישׁ 1 We know from [35:25](../35/25.md) that women were included in the skilled workers, so **man** means every person. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||||
36:1 tr3p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche חֲכַם־לֵ֗ב 1 Here, **of heart** refers to innately possessing something, in this case ability or skill. Some languages will use a different body part for this image. Alternate translation: “with innate ability” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -2388,81 +2388,53 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
36:6 k1qm מְלָאכָ֖ה 1 Here, **work** means the sorts of crafted items listed in the previous chapter.
|
||||
36:6 utcw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis מֵהָבִֽיא 1 In some languages you may need to provide an object for this sentence. Alternate translation: “from bringing contributions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
36:7 ipiu וְהַמְּלָאכָ֗ה 1 Here, **work** means the sorts of crafted items listed in the previous chapter.
|
||||
36:8 kw33 0 # General Information:\n\nExcept for tense and the addition of **every skilled of heart among the doers of the work,** this verse is identical to [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md).
|
||||
36:8 kw33 0 Except for tense and the addition of **every skilled of heart among the doers of the work,** this verse is identical to [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md).
|
||||
36:8 l7ub rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche כָל־חֲכַם־לֵ֜ב 1 See how you translated this in [35:21](../35/21.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
36:8 zz0w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun עָשָׂ֥ה 1 Throughout verses 8-38 the word **he** used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “they made” or “a craftsman made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
|
||||
36:9 p2mr 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 26:2](../26/02.md). Tense is implied.
|
||||
36:10 z6sq 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:3](../26/03.md).
|
||||
36:11 yw91 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:4](../26/04.md).
|
||||
36:12 k1qq 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:5](../26/05.md).
|
||||
36:13 z2zi General Information 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:6](../26/06.md).
|
||||
36:14 m2ac 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:7](../26/07.md).
|
||||
36:15 fa6i 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:8](../26/08.md).
|
||||
36:16 wwj6 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to the first sentence of [Exodus 26:9](../26/09.md).
|
||||
36:17 qt9b 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:10](../26/10.md).
|
||||
36:18 mq1j 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 26:11](../26/11.md). The difference is the absence of the middle clause from 26:11.
|
||||
36:19 p3ke 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:14](../26/14.md).
|
||||
36:20 t739 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:15](../26/15.md).
|
||||
36:21 prx5 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 26:16](../26/16.md).
|
||||
36:22 l8yx 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:17](../26/17.md).
|
||||
36:23 ev65 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:18](../26/18.md).
|
||||
36:24 ln2x 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md).
|
||||
36:25 w2wz 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:20](../26/20.md).
|
||||
36:26 gbm9 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 26:21](../26/21.md).
|
||||
36:27 a7js 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:22](../26/22.md).
|
||||
36:28 hw9c 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:23](../26/23.md).
|
||||
36:29 u396 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:24](../26/24.md).
|
||||
36:30 mu5n 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:25](../26/25.md).
|
||||
36:9-18 p2mr 0 These verses are almost identical to [Exodus 26:2-10](../26/02.md). Tense is implied.
|
||||
36:18 mq1j 0 This verse is similar to [Exodus 26:11](../26/11.md). The difference is the absence of the middle clause from 26:11.
|
||||
36:19-20 p3ke 0 These verses are almost identical to [Exodus 26:14-15](../26/14.md).
|
||||
36:21 prx5 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 26:16](../26/16.md).
|
||||
36:22-25 l8yx 0 These verses are almost identical to [Exodus 26:17-20](../26/17.md).
|
||||
36:26 gbm9 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 26:21](../26/21.md).
|
||||
36:27-28 a7js 0 These verses are almost identical to [Exodus 26:22-23](../26/22.md).
|
||||
36:29-30 u396 0 These verses are very similar to [Exodus 26:24-25](../26/24.md).
|
||||
36:30 r252 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit שְׁנֵ֤י אֲדָנִים֙ שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֔ים תַּ֖חַת הַקֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָאֶחָֽד 1 The list formula from [26:25](../26/25.md) is strangely shortened here but has the same meaning. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
36:31 cf2p 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:26](../26/26.md).
|
||||
36:32 p4wd 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:27](../26/27.md).
|
||||
36:33 h94y 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:28](../26/28.md).
|
||||
36:34 i17v 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:29](../26/29.md).
|
||||
36:35 pfc5 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:31](../26/31.md).
|
||||
36:36 hg2q 0 # General Information:\n\nAside from some verbal differences, this verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:32](../26/32.md).
|
||||
36:37 r5ya 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md).
|
||||
36:38 pr67 0 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:37](../26/37.md).
|
||||
36:31-32 cf2p 0 These verses are almost identical to [Exodus 26:26-27](../26/26.md).
|
||||
36:33 h94y 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:28](../26/28.md).
|
||||
36:34 i17v 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:29](../26/29.md).
|
||||
36:35 pfc5 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:31](../26/31.md).
|
||||
36:36 hg2q 0 Aside from some verbal differences, this verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:32](../26/32.md).
|
||||
36:37 r5ya 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md).
|
||||
36:38 pr67 0 See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:37](../26/37.md).
|
||||
37:intro mt99 0 # Exodus 37 General Notes\n\n## Structure\r\n\r\n- v. 1-9 Making the ark, see [Exodus 25:10-20](../25/10.md)\r\n- v. 10-16 Making the table, see [Exodus 25:23-29](../25/23.md)\r\n- v. 17-24 Making the lampstand, see [Exodus 25:31-39](../25/31.md)\r\n- v. 25-28 Making the altar for incense, see [Exodus 30:1-5](../30/01.md)\r\n- v. 29 Making the oil and incense, see [Exodus 30:22-38](../30/22.md)\n\n## Potential translation issues\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction of the Dwelling and the items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions.\nBe sure to consult your previous work for consistency.\n- Throughout the chapter the word **he** is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
37:1 byr3 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:10](../25/10.md).
|
||||
37:2 kb3s 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md).
|
||||
37:3 pb6v 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:12](../25/12.md).
|
||||
37:4 nr8y 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:13](../25/13.md).
|
||||
37:5 v9j7 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:14](../25/14.md).
|
||||
37:6 liw8 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:17](../25/17.md).
|
||||
37:7 nhi3 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:18](../25/18.md).
|
||||
37:8 g96y 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:19](../25/19.md).
|
||||
37:9 e6na 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:20](../25/20.md).
|
||||
37:10 ktf8 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:23](../25/23.md).
|
||||
37:11 l2kv 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:24](../25/24.md).
|
||||
37:12 i1ba 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:25](../25/25.md).
|
||||
37:13 b56c 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:26](../25/26.md).
|
||||
37:14 tc3u 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:27](../25/27.md).
|
||||
37:15 zkr8 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:28](../25/28.md).
|
||||
37:16 h598 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:29](../25/29.md).
|
||||
37:17 edx6 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:31](../25/31.md).
|
||||
37:18 kuh2 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:32](../25/32.md).
|
||||
37:19 g1y9 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:33](../25/33.md).
|
||||
37:20 nl54 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 25:34](../25/34.md).
|
||||
37:21 x1u5 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:35](../25/35.md).
|
||||
37:22 ks9z 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:36](../25/36.md).
|
||||
37:23 b2jq 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical with [Exodus 25:37-38](../25/37.md), excluding the purpose clause in v. 37 (“and it will hold up its lamps, and it will make light on the side of its face”).
|
||||
37:24 uz5h 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:39](../25/39.md).
|
||||
37:25 el8w 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 30:1-2](../30/01.md).
|
||||
37:26 ep66 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 30:3](../30/03.md).
|
||||
37:27 zez2 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 30:4](../30/04.md).
|
||||
37:28 hw37 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 30:5](../30/05.md).
|
||||
37:29 c992 0 # General Information:\n\nFor the **oil**, see [Exodus 30:25](../30/25.md), and for the **incense** see [25:6](../25/06.md) and [30:35](../30/35.md).
|
||||
37:1 byr3 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:10](../25/10.md).
|
||||
37:2 kb3s 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md).
|
||||
37:3-5 pb6v 0 These verses are almost identical to [Exodus 25:12-14](../25/12.md).
|
||||
37:6-9 liw8 0 These verses are almost identical to [Exodus 25:17-20](../25/17.md).
|
||||
37:10-14 ktf8 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:23-27](../25/23.md).
|
||||
37:15-16 zkr8 0 These verses are very similar to [Exodus 25:28-29](../25/28.md).
|
||||
37:17 edx6 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:31](../25/31.md).
|
||||
37:18-20 kuh2 0 These verses are identical to [Exodus 25:32-34](../25/32.md).
|
||||
37:21-22 x1u5 0 These verses are almost identical to [Exodus 25:35-36](../25/35.md).
|
||||
37:23 b2jq 0 This verse is almost identical with [Exodus 25:37-38](../25/37.md), excluding the purpose clause in v. 37 (“and it will hold up its lamps, and it will make light on the side of its face”).
|
||||
37:24 uz5h 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:39](../25/39.md).
|
||||
37:25 el8w 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 30:1-2](../30/01.md).
|
||||
37:26 ep66 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 30:3](../30/03.md).
|
||||
37:27 zez2 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 30:4](../30/04.md).
|
||||
37:28 hw37 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 30:5](../30/05.md).
|
||||
37:29 c992 0 For the **oil**, see [Exodus 30:25](../30/25.md), and for the **incense** see [25:6](../25/06.md) and [30:35](../30/35.md).
|
||||
38:intro hp86 0 # Exodus 38 General Notes\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction of the Dwelling and the items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions.\nBe sure to consult your previous work for consistency. Verses 1-20 of this chapter follow [Exodus 27:1-19](../27/01.md) almost verse for verse.\n- Throughout the chapter the word **he** is used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
38:1 r81c General Information 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:1](../27/01.md).
|
||||
38:2 g71x General Information 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md).
|
||||
38:3 v73t General Information 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:3](../27/03.md).
|
||||
38:4 rx7v 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md) and [Exodus 27:5](../27/05.md). One part of 27:4 is rearranged into 38:5.
|
||||
38:5 kp6w 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to the second half of [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md).
|
||||
38:6 l258 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:6](../27/06.md).
|
||||
38:7 ys63 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:7](../27/07.md) and the first part of [27:8](../27/08.md).
|
||||
38:4 rx7v 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md) and [Exodus 27:5](../27/05.md). One part of 27:4 is rearranged into 38:5.
|
||||
38:5 kp6w 0 This verse is very similar to the second half of [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md).
|
||||
38:6 l258 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:6](../27/06.md).
|
||||
38:7 ys63 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:7](../27/07.md) and the first part of [27:8](../27/08.md).
|
||||
38:8 e6gd וַיַּ֗עַשׂ אֵ֚ת הַכִּיּ֣וֹר נְחֹ֔שֶׁת וְאֵ֖ת כַּנּ֣וֹ נְחֹ֑שֶׁת 1 This portion is almost identical to [Exodus 30:18](../30/18.md).
|
||||
38:8 mdx9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּמַרְאֹת֙ 1 The **bronze** came from the **mirrors.** If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the bronze mirrors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
38:9 clk6 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to [Exodus 27:9](../27/09.md).
|
||||
38:9 clk6 0 This verse is similar to [Exodus 27:9](../27/09.md).
|
||||
38:10 nz6q General Information 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 27:10](../27/10.md).
|
||||
38:11 mp6n General Information 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 27:11](../27/11.md).
|
||||
38:11 xl4c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis מֵאָ֣ה בָֽאַמָּ֔ה 1 Here, “the curtains of the courtyard” and “long” are both omitted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the curtains of the courtyard were 100 cubits long” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -2501,36 +2473,36 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
39:intro mll6 0 # Exodus 39 General Notes\n\n- This chapter continues the record of the construction in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions. The special, holy clothing mentioned in previous chapters is produced to the correct specifications in this chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\nBe sure to consult your previous work to maintain consistency. Verses 1-31 of this chapter follow [Exodus 28:1-37](../28/01.md) with some differences. Verses 33-41 follow [35:10-19](../35/10.md).\n- Throughout the chapter the people making the items are referred to interchangeably as **he** or **they**. Both are generic nouns referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could change all instances to “they” or “he” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
39:1 h8kg as Yahweh had commanded Moses 0 See how you translated similar instructions in [Exodus 28:4-5](../28/04.md).
|
||||
39:1 e1xh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns בִּגְדֵ֤י הַקֹּ֨דֶשׁ֙ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you can express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this in [28:2](../28/02.md). Alternate translation: “the holy clothes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
39:2 b9mg 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:6](../28/06.md).
|
||||
39:4 pq62 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [28:7](../28/07.md).
|
||||
39:5 g75w 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:8](../28/08.md).
|
||||
39:6 k7vw 0 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 28:9](../28/09.md) and especially [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md). Here, as there, the **sons of Israel** literally means the twelve sons, Rueben through Benjamin, not the Israelite nation.
|
||||
39:7 ize6 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to the first half of [Exodus 28:12](../28/12.md).
|
||||
39:8 mlf6 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:15](../28/15.md); a few words are omitted here.
|
||||
39:9 lkt1 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:16](../28/16.md); a few words are added or repeated here.
|
||||
39:2 b9mg 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:6](../28/06.md).
|
||||
39:4 pq62 0 This verse is very similar to [28:7](../28/07.md).
|
||||
39:5 g75w 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:8](../28/08.md).
|
||||
39:6 k7vw 0 See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 28:9](../28/09.md) and especially [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md). Here, as there, the **sons of Israel** literally means the twelve sons, Rueben through Benjamin, not the Israelite nation.
|
||||
39:7 ize6 0 This verse is almost identical to the first half of [Exodus 28:12](../28/12.md).
|
||||
39:8 mlf6 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:15](../28/15.md); a few words are omitted here.
|
||||
39:9 lkt1 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:16](../28/16.md); a few words are added or repeated here.
|
||||
39:10 m54c They set in it 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:17](../28/17.md).
|
||||
39:11 qx96 an emerald, a sapphire, and a diamond 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 28:18](../28/18.md).
|
||||
39:12 kk8t a jacinth, an agate, and an amethyst 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 28:19](../28/19.md).
|
||||
39:13 l9wa a beryl, an onyx, and a jasper 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:20](../28/20.md).
|
||||
39:14 z5va 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:21](../28/21.md).
|
||||
39:15 byz8 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:22](../28/22.md).
|
||||
39:16 b8m6 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:23-24](../28/23.md).
|
||||
39:17 w2s4 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:24](../28/24.md).
|
||||
39:18 bw76 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 28:25](../28/25.md) except for verb tense.
|
||||
39:19 nd41 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 28:26](../28/26.md) except for verb tense.
|
||||
39:20 w8wz 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is identical to [Exodus 28:27](../28/27.md) except for verb tense.
|
||||
39:21 zu91 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:28](../28/28.md) except for the note about Yahweh’s command.
|
||||
39:22 vdw1 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical to most of [Exodus 28:31-32](../28/31.md).
|
||||
39:23 cyc1 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:32](../28/32.md).
|
||||
39:24 eak6 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to part of [Exodus 28:33](../28/33.md).
|
||||
39:25 sx9b 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is similar to parts of [Exodus 28:33](../28/33.md).
|
||||
39:26 gtg5 0 # General Information:\n\nThe first part of this verse is almost identical to the first part of [Exodus 28:34](../28/34.md).
|
||||
39:27 pz63 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses 27-29 reflect [Exodus 28:39](../28/39.md), [40](../28/40.md), and [42](../28/42.md) but in a different order.
|
||||
39:14 z5va 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:21](../28/21.md).
|
||||
39:15 byz8 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:22](../28/22.md).
|
||||
39:16 b8m6 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:23-24](../28/23.md).
|
||||
39:17 w2s4 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:24](../28/24.md).
|
||||
39:18 bw76 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 28:25](../28/25.md) except for verb tense.
|
||||
39:19 nd41 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 28:26](../28/26.md) except for verb tense.
|
||||
39:20 w8wz 0 This verse is identical to [Exodus 28:27](../28/27.md) except for verb tense.
|
||||
39:21 zu91 0 This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:28](../28/28.md) except for the note about Yahweh’s command.
|
||||
39:22 vdw1 0 This verse is almost identical to most of [Exodus 28:31-32](../28/31.md).
|
||||
39:23 cyc1 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:32](../28/32.md).
|
||||
39:24 eak6 0 This verse is similar to part of [Exodus 28:33](../28/33.md).
|
||||
39:25 sx9b 0 This verse is similar to parts of [Exodus 28:33](../28/33.md).
|
||||
39:26 gtg5 0 The first part of this verse is almost identical to the first part of [Exodus 28:34](../28/34.md).
|
||||
39:27 pz63 0 Verses 27-29 reflect [Exodus 28:39](../28/39.md), [40](../28/40.md), and [42](../28/42.md) but in a different order.
|
||||
39:28 um4e turban 0 Verses 27-29 reflect [Exodus 28:39](../28/39.md), [40](../28/40.md), and [42](../28/42.md) but in a different order.
|
||||
39:29 hn5g sash 0 Verses 27-29 reflect [Exodus 28:39](../28/39.md), [40](../28/40.md), and [42](../28/42.md) but in a different order.
|
||||
39:30 kq33 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is almost identical [Exodus 28:36](../28/36.md). See [29:6](../29/06.md) for the **crown of holiness**.
|
||||
39:31 fml2 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:37](../28/37.md).
|
||||
39:32 jh64 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse marks the end of the narrative of the construction of the Dwelling. More precisely, it seems to mark the beginning of an ending section. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||||
39:30 kq33 0 This verse is almost identical [Exodus 28:36](../28/36.md). See [29:6](../29/06.md) for the **crown of holiness**.
|
||||
39:31 fml2 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 28:37](../28/37.md).
|
||||
39:32 jh64 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 This verse marks the end of the narrative of the construction of the Dwelling. More precisely, it seems to mark the beginning of an ending section. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||||
39:32 z1z7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד 1 The **tabernacle** and **tent of meeting** are the same thing. The two interchangeable terms are brought together here in a poetic doubling to bring this part of the narrative to a close. If your readers would find this confusing you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST. Alternate translation: “holy meeting tent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
39:32 et19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וַֽיַּעֲשׂוּ֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כְּ֠כֹל אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֖ה כֵּ֥ן עָשֽׂוּ 1 Here, **thus they did** parallels the whole rest of the sentence. Like the doubling of the terms for **tabernacle** this brings the narrative of building to an emphatic conclusion. If this sort of parallelism would convey a meaning other than this emphatic conclusion in your language you may need to use another natural way to close the narrative with emphasis on the Israelites complete obedience. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel faithfully did exactly according to all that Yahweh had commanded Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
39:33 ri54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent So the work on the Dwelling, the tent of meeting, was finished. The people of Israel did everything 0 This verse starts a short narrative of the Israelites bringing and presenting the items for the Dwelling to Moses for inspection. It is a summary of the construction and extended conclusion to the last few chapters. Your team may need to decide how to group verse 32, as it both closes the construction narrative and introduces this next section, which ends with a very similar summary statement in [verses 42-43](../39/42.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -2539,10 +2511,9 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
39:34 l0fi פָּרֹ֥כֶת הַמָּסָֽךְ 1 See how you translated similar phrases to this in [35:12](../35/12.md).
|
||||
39:35 i7d9 atonement lid 0 See how you translated similar phrases to this in [35:12](../35/12.md).
|
||||
39:36 knn8 bread of the presence 0 This verse is almost identical to [35:13](../35/13.md).
|
||||
39:37 nzph bread of the presence 0 This verse is very similar to [35:14](../35/14.md).
|
||||
39:38 elv1 bread of the presence 0 This verse is very similar to [35:15](../35/15.md).
|
||||
39:37-38 nzph bread of the presence 0 These verses are very similar to [35:14-15](../35/14.md).
|
||||
39:39 e755 grate 0 This verse is almost identical with [35:16](../35/16.md).
|
||||
39:40 i8lm Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis verse is almost identical with [35:17](../35/17.md) and parts of [35:18](../35/18.md).
|
||||
39:40 i8lm 0 This verse is almost identical with [35:17](../35/17.md) and parts of [35:18](../35/18.md).
|
||||
39:40 ajt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet הַמִּשְׁכָּ֖ן לְאֹ֥הֶל מוֹעֵֽד 1 These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [verse 32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the Dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
39:41 z3ip the Dwelling, the tent of meeting 0 This verse is identical to [35:19](../35/19.md).
|
||||
39:42 ct6k Thus the people 0 This verse is almost identical to the second half of [verse 32](../39/32.md).
|
||||
|
|
@ -2557,9 +2528,9 @@ front:intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
|
|||
40:5 b3ct rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֖י 1 Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
40:6 o5sz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לִפְנֵ֕י 1 Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
40:6 nqha rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֥ן אֹֽהֶל־מוֹעֵֽד 1 These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [39:32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the Dwelling, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
40:10 yiq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִֽׁים 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||||
40:12 gqld 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses 12-15 are similar to [Exodus 29:4-9](../29/04.md).
|
||||
40:16 xl61 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent 0 # General Information:\n\nThis statement starts a new section in which Moses does all the things **just as Yahweh had commanded**; this poetic obedience statement was seen so often in the previous chapter. You may wish to mark this transition and poetic statement in a particular way in your language that is similar to how you did in the last chapter. See [39:32](../39/32.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
40:10 yiq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִֽׁים 1 Here, **holiest holy** means extremely or uniquely holy. If this form would not express that this item would become uniquely holy in your language you may need to find another way to express this idea. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extraordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||||
40:12 gqld 0 Verses 12-15 are similar to [Exodus 29:4-9](../29/04.md).
|
||||
40:16 xl61 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent 0 This statement starts a new section in which Moses does all the things **just as Yahweh had commanded**; this poetic obedience statement was seen so often in the previous chapter. You may wish to mark this transition and poetic statement in a particular way in your language that is similar to how you did in the last chapter. See [39:32](../39/32.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
40:17 r6pc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive הוּקַ֖ם הַמִּשְׁכָּֽן 1 The use of the passive here indicates that the important thing is the completion of the task of setting up the tent on the specific date Yahweh had commanded. If your language would show that focus in a different way, use a natural form to do that. Alternate translation: “that they set up the Dwelling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
40:17 gzu5 בַּחֹ֧דֶשׁ הָרִאשׁ֛וֹן בַּשָּׁנָ֥ה הַשֵּׁנִ֖ית בְּאֶחָ֣ד לַחֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 This refers to exactly one year after God rescued his people from Egypt. See [Exodus 12:2](../12/02.md).
|
||||
40:17 wnh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בַּחֹ֧דֶשׁ הָרִאשׁ֛וֹן בַּשָּׁנָ֥ה הַשֵּׁנִ֖ית בְּאֶחָ֣ד 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “in month one, year two, on day one of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
Can't render this file because it is too large.
|
120
tn_EZR.tsv
120
tn_EZR.tsv
|
|
@ -59,15 +59,15 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
1:8 w8rk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וַֽיִּסְפְּרֵם֙ לְשֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֔ר 1 Here, **he** refers to Mithredath, and **them** refers to the objects for the temple. The expression **counted them out** probably does not mean that Mithredath handed Sheshbazzar the objects one at a time while announcing the number of each one. It probably means that Mithredath gave Sheshbazzar the objects along with a document that listed how many there were of each kind, as recorded in [1:9](../01/09.md) and [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “Mithredath turned them over to Sheshbazzar along with a detailed list of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
1:8 wb5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names לְשֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֔ר 1 This leader of the first group of exiles to return to Judah, who is called **Sheshbazzar** here and in [1:11](../01/11.md), [5:14](../05/14.md), and [5:16](../05/16.md), seems to be the same person who is called Zerubbabel in the rest of the book. The reason for the difference in names is not clear. Some interpreters suggest that he was known as Sheshbazzar in the Persian court and that he used the name Zerubbabel as governor of Judah. There are examples in the Bible of Jews having both a Persian name and a Hebrew name. It would probably be best simply to translate both names consistently where they appear without calling attention to the difference, but you could add this possible explanation in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
1:8 qsti הַנָּשִׂ֖יא לִיהוּדָֽה׃ 1 The book says in [5:14](../05/14.md) that Cyrus appointed Sheshbazzar to be the governor of the province of Judah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use that phrase to describe him here. Alternate translation: “whom Cyrus had appointed to be the governor of the province of Judah”
|
||||
1:9 hu9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְאֵ֖לֶּה מִסְפָּרָ֑ם 1 # General Information:\n\nThis expression means that what follows is the number of each kind of utensil that Cyrus is returning (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
1:9 noww מַחֲלָפִ֖ים 1 # General Information:\n\nThis word occurs only here in the Hebrew Bible, and there is some disagreement about its meaning. It is probably a borrowed term from a related language that means “knife,” but the ancient Greek translation took its meaning to be “replacements,” that is, basins to replace others that became unusable. You may see translations that follow the ancient Greek, but we recommend following the Hebrew.
|
||||
1:9 hu9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְאֵ֖לֶּה מִסְפָּרָ֑ם 1 This expression means that what follows is the number of each kind of utensil that Cyrus is returning (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
1:9 noww מַחֲלָפִ֖ים 1 This word occurs only here in the Hebrew Bible, and there is some disagreement about its meaning. It is probably a borrowed term from a related language that means “knife,” but the ancient Greek translation took its meaning to be “replacements,” that is, basins to replace others that became unusable. You may see translations that follow the ancient Greek, but we recommend following the Hebrew.
|
||||
1:10 ja6u כְּפ֤וֹרֵי כֶ֨סֶף֙ מִשְׁנִ֔ים 1 This means that these bowls were a different type of bowl than the gold ones just mentioned. This could also mean that they were second in rank of status or honor behind the gold bowls. It does not mean that the silver was of a different type than the silver in the basins described in [1:9](../01/09.md).
|
||||
1:11 z55f כָּל־כֵּלִים֙ לַזָּהָ֣ב וְלַכֶּ֔סֶף חֲמֵ֥שֶׁת אֲלָפִ֖ים וְאַרְבַּ֣ע מֵא֑וֹת 1 This expression means that the total number of these gold and silver objects was **5,400**. Verses [1:9](../01/09.md) and [1:10](../01/10.md) actually list only 2,499 items, and it is not clear why the numbers are different. The explanation does not seem to be that the total here includes other miscellaneous items because the last item on the list itself is other vessels. It would probably be best simply to report this total without calling attention to the difference and trying to explain it, since there is no clear reason for it.
|
||||
1:11 i30r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom הַכֹּ֞ל הֶעֱלָ֣ה שֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֗ר עִ֚ם הֵעָל֣וֹת הַגּוֹלָ֔ה מִבָּבֶ֖ל לִירוּשָׁלִָֽם 1 Like the similar expression in [1:3](../01/03.md), here the book says **brought up** and **going up** because the Jews had to travel from a river valley up into the mountains to return from exile to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “Sheshbazzar brought all these vessels along when he traveled to Jerusalem with the group of Jews who had been taken away from their homeland but who were now returning from Babylon to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
1:11 kt84 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns הַגּוֹלָ֔ה 1 The abstract noun **exiles** refers, in this context, to the community of Jews who were living in Babylon because the Babylonians had relocated them away from their homeland when they conquered Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the idea behind this term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the group of Jews who had been taken away from their homeland” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
1:11 fi2e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מִבָּבֶ֖ל 1 **Babylon** is the name of a city. The book also uses this name for the empire that was once ruled from that city, and for the region that had been at the heart of this empire that became a province in the Persian Empire. The name occurs many times in the book, and it will be helpful to your readers if you translate it consistently each time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:intro rr42 0 # Ezra 2 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Genealogy\n\nPeople had to prove through their genealogies that they were priests or that they\nwere even Jews. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]])
|
||||
2:1 ezk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּנֵ֣י הַמְּדִינָ֗ה 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **the sons of the province** is an idiom that means that these people originated in the province of Judah. Alternate translation: “the people from the province of Judah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
2:1 ezk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּנֵ֣י הַמְּדִינָ֗ה 1 Here, **the sons of the province** is an idiom that means that these people originated in the province of Judah. Alternate translation: “the people from the province of Judah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
2:1 ponw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy הַמְּדִינָ֗ה 1 **The province** means the province of Judah. The book is referring to Judah by something associated with it, its status as a province. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
2:1 byc2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom הָֽעֹלִים֙ 1 **Went up** means traveled from Babylon back to Judah, since that involves going from a river valley up into the mountains. Alternate translation: “those who returned to Judah from Babylon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
2:1 czrg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns מִשְּׁבִ֣י הַגּוֹלָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר הֶגְלָ֛ה נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֥ר מֶֽלֶךְ־בָּבֶ֖ל לְבָבֶ֑ל 1 The abstract nouns **captivity** and **exiles** refer to the way Nebuchadnezzar took these people prisoner and transported them away from their homeland. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the idea behind these terms with verbs. Alternate translation: “after Nebuchadnezzar, the king of Babylon, had captured their ancestors, transported them to Babylon, and held them there in a foreign land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
2:2 tmp8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names זְרֻבָּבֶ֗ל יֵשׁ֡וּעַ נְ֠חֶמְיָה שְׂרָיָ֨ה רְֽעֵלָיָ֜ה מָרְדֳּכַ֥י בִּלְשָׁ֛ן מִסְפָּ֥ר בִּגְוַ֖י רְח֣וּם בַּעֲנָ֑ה 1 These are the names of eleven men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:2 x7au rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names יֵשׁ֡וּעַ 1 This is the high priest, who has the same name as the Levite who is introduced in [2:40](../02/40.md). The spelling of this name varies throughout the Bible. To be clear which man is being referred to, the UST will spell this name “Joshua” for the high priest and “Jeshua” for the Levite. You may want to consider whether doing something similar would be helpful for your readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:2 z77p מִסְפַּ֕ר אַנְשֵׁ֖י עַ֥ם יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 In keeping with the practices of the time, the totals in the list that follows likely include just the men and not also the women and children. Alternate translation: “This is how many men came back from each Israelite clan and town”
|
||||
2:3 i2m7 בְּנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔שׁ אַלְפַּ֕יִם מֵאָ֖ה שִׁבְעִ֥ים וּשְׁנָֽיִם 1 # General Information:\n\nThis means that from the descendants **of Parosh**, **2,172** returned. To help make this clear for your readers, you could say something like “returned” throughout [2:3–42](../02/03.md), after the name of each group and the number that is given.
|
||||
2:3 i2m7 בְּנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔שׁ אַלְפַּ֕יִם מֵאָ֖ה שִׁבְעִ֥ים וּשְׁנָֽיִם 1 This means that from the descendants **of Parosh**, **2,172** returned. To help make this clear for your readers, you could say something like “returned” throughout [2:3–42](../02/03.md), after the name of each group and the number that is given.
|
||||
2:3 gmbm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔שׁ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Parosh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:3 zew1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פַרְעֹ֔שׁ 1 **Parosh** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:4 xs2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י שְׁפַטְיָ֔ה 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Shephatiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
2:5 inj3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אָרַ֔ח 1 **Arah** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:6 qyea rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵֽי־פַחַ֥ת מוֹאָ֛ב לִבְנֵ֥י יֵשׁ֖וּעַ יוֹאָ֑ב 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:6 fw6a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פַחַ֥ת מוֹאָ֛ב & יֵשׁ֖וּעַ 1 **Pahath-Moab** is the name of a man, and **Jeshua** and **Joab** are the names of two of his male descendants. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:7 a6df rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י עֵילָ֔ם 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Elam” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:7 a6df rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י עֵילָ֔ם 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Elam” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:7 ytv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names עֵילָ֔ם 1 **Elam** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:8 ryuy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י זַתּ֔וּא 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Zattu” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:8 d53m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names זַתּ֔וּא 1 **Zattu** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
2:9 da7k rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names זַכָּ֔י 1 **Zakkai** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:10 fo1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י בָנִ֔י 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Bani” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:10 jcd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בָנִ֔י 1 **Bani** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:11 ak1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י בֵבָ֔י 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Bebai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:11 ak1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י בֵבָ֔י 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Bebai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:11 h16w rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בֵבָ֔י 1 **Bebai** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:12 bhyt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י עַזְגָּ֔ד 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Azgad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:12 rxn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names עַזְגָּ֔ד 1 **Azgad** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
2:13 uzn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֲדֹ֣נִיקָ֔ם 1 **Adonikam** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:14 ptzp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י בִגְוָ֔י 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Bigvai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:14 qkv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בִגְוָ֔י 1 **Bigvai** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:15 u5zk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י עָדִ֔ין 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Adin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:15 u5zk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י עָדִ֔ין 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Adin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:15 it7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names עָדִ֔ין 1 **Adin** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:16 kk2c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵֽי־אָטֵ֥ר 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Ater who were descendants of Hezekiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:16 vui3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אָטֵ֥ר לִֽיחִזְקִיָּ֖ה 1 **Ater** is the name of a man, and **Hezekiah** is the name of one of his descendants. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
2:17 t3k5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בֵצָ֔י 1 **Bezai** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:18 ghnw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י יוֹרָ֔ה 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Jorah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:18 k95c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names יוֹרָ֔ה 1 **Jorah** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:19 i6kg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י חָשֻׁ֔ם 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Hashum” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:19 i6kg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י חָשֻׁ֔ם 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Hashum” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:19 j9nm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names חָשֻׁ֔ם 1 **Hashum** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:20 r5bq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֥י גִבָּ֖ר 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Gibbar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:20 g26q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names גִבָּ֖ר 1 **Gibbar** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -129,17 +129,16 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
2:29 j5sn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names נְב֖וֹ 1 **Nebo** is the name of a town. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:30 m297 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּנֵ֣י מַגְבִּ֔ישׁ 1 The list speaks here of the **sons of Magbish**. This is an idiom that means that these men were from families that had originally lived in those towns. Alternate translation: “From the town of Magbish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
2:30 kvd9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מַגְבִּ֔ישׁ 1 **Magbish** is the name of a town. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:31 bv43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּנֵי֙ עֵילָ֣ם אַחֵ֔ר 1 # General Information:\n\nThe list speaks here of the **sons of Elam**. This is an idiom that means that these men were from families that had originally lived in this town. (“The other Elam” indicates that this is the town of that name, not the person of that name mentioned in [2:7](../02/07.md).) Alternate translation: “From the town of Elam” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
2:31 bv43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּנֵי֙ עֵילָ֣ם אַחֵ֔ר 1 The list speaks here of the **sons of Elam**. This is an idiom that means that these men were from families that had originally lived in this town. (“The other Elam” indicates that this is the town of that name, not the person of that name mentioned in [2:7](../02/07.md).) Alternate translation: “From the town of Elam” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
2:31 sl5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names עֵילָ֣ם 1 Here, **Elam** is the name of a town. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:32 fqlf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּנֵ֣י חָרִ֔ם 1 The list speaks here of the **sons of Harim**. This is an idiom that means that these men were from families that had originally lived in this town. Alternate translation: “From the town of Harim” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
2:32 ubs3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names חָרִ֔ם 1 **Harim** is the name of a town. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:33 ti5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּנֵי־לֹד֙ חָדִ֣יד וְאוֹנ֔וֹ 1 The list speaks here of the **sons of Lod, Hadid, and Ono**. This is an idiom that means that these men were from families that had originally lived in these towns. Alternate translation: “From the towns of Lod, Hadid, and Ono” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
2:33 e3tw rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names לֹד֙ חָדִ֣יד וְאוֹנ֔וֹ 1 **Lod, Hadid, and Ono** are the names of towns. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:34 eyhe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּנֵ֣י יְרֵח֔וֹ 1 Here, the list speaks of the **sons of Jericho**. This is an idiom that means that these men were from families that had originally lived in this city. Alternate translation: “From the city of Jericho” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
2:34 pt5k rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names יְרֵח֔וֹ 1 # General Information:\n\n**Jericho** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:35 frxs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom בְּנֵ֣י סְנָאָ֔ה 1 The list speaks here of the **sons of Senaah**. This is an idiom that means that these men were from families that had originally lived in this town. Alternate translation: “From the town of Senaah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
2:35 ce4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names סְנָאָ֔ה 1 **Senaah** is the name of a town. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:36 c52r הַֽכֹּהֲנִ֑ים 1 # General Information:\n\n**The priests** were men chosen to offer sacrifices to God on behalf of God’s people, and to perform other duties and functions to represent God to the people and to represent the people to God. Alternate translation: “This is how many men returned from each family of priests”
|
||||
2:36 c52r הַֽכֹּהֲנִ֑ים 1 **The priests** were men chosen to offer sacrifices to God on behalf of God’s people, and to perform other duties and functions to represent God to the people and to represent the people to God. Alternate translation: “This is how many men returned from each family of priests”
|
||||
2:36 xd3k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֤י יְדַֽעְיָה֙ לְבֵ֣ית יֵשׁ֔וּעַ תְּשַׁ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת שִׁבְעִ֥ים וּשְׁלֹשָֽׁה 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Jedaiah who were descendants of Jeshua, 973 returned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:36 m352 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names יְדַֽעְיָה֙ & יֵשׁ֔וּעַ 1 **Jedaiah** is the name of a man, and **Jeshua** is the name of one of his male descendants. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:36 u51b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy לְבֵ֣ית יֵשׁ֔וּעַ 1 Here, **house** describes all the people descended from a particular person. The book is describing all of the descendants **of Jeshua** as if they were one household living together. Alternate translation: “who were descendants of Jeshua” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -149,7 +148,7 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
2:38 w3dr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פַשְׁח֔וּר 1 **Pashhur** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:39 jzxo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֣י חָרִ֔ם 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Harim” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:39 g31h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names חָרִ֔ם 1 **Harim** is the name of a man. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Harim” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:40 tm51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַלְוִיִּ֑ם 1 # General Information:\n\n**The Levites** were descendants of Levi. They had the special assignment of helping the priests. Alternate translation: “Some Levites also returned” or “Some of the descendants of Levi also returned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
2:40 tm51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַלְוִיִּ֑ם 1 **The Levites** were descendants of Levi. They had the special assignment of helping the priests. Alternate translation: “Some Levites also returned” or “Some of the descendants of Levi also returned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
2:40 vug8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־יֵשׁ֧וּעַ וְקַדְמִיאֵ֛ל לִבְנֵ֥י הוֹדַוְיָ֖ה 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Jeshua and Kadmiel, who were descended from Hodaviah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:40 yu1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names יֵשׁ֧וּעַ וְקַדְמִיאֵ֛ל & הוֹדַוְיָ֖ה 1 **Jeshua and Kadmiel** are men’s names, and **Hodaviah** is the name of their male ancestor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:41 t56r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַֽמְשֹׁרְרִ֑ים 1 **The ones who sang** refers to vocal musicians who led in worship, in processions, and ceremonies, producing music and chants that emphasized and enhanced the occasion. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -159,29 +158,29 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
2:42 i72w rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַשֹּֽׁעֲרִ֗ים 1 Here, **the gatekeepers** refers to people who had been assigned to the gates of the city of Jerusalem and to the gates of the temple within the city. They were responsible for controlling access to these places. They would open and close the gates at times and for reasons set by the authorities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
2:42 imn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־שַׁלּ֤וּם בְּנֵֽי־אָטֵר֙ בְּנֵי־טַלְמ֣וֹן בְּנֵי־עַקּ֔וּב בְּנֵ֥י חֲטִיטָ֖א בְּנֵ֣י שֹׁבָ֑י 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “from the descendants of Shallum, Ater, Talmon, Akkub, Hatita, and Shobai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:42 lyb8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names שַׁלּ֤וּם & אָטֵר֙ & טַלְמ֣וֹן & עַקּ֔וּב & חֲטִיטָ֖א & שֹׁבָ֑י 1 These are the names of six men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:43 fhw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַנְּתִינִ֑ים 1 # General Information:\n\nThe term **Nethinim** describes servants who worked in the temple. Alternate translation: “The temple servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
2:43 fhw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown הַנְּתִינִ֑ים 1 The term **Nethinim** describes servants who worked in the temple. Alternate translation: “The temple servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
2:43 nt2x הַנְּתִינִ֑ים 1 Alternate translation: “Some of the descendants of the temple servants also returned”
|
||||
2:43 m9ay rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־צִיחָ֥א בְנֵי־חֲשׂוּפָ֖א בְּנֵ֥י טַבָּעֽוֹת׃ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “they were from the descendants of Ziha, Hasupha, Tabbaoth” beginning a series that will continue through [2:54](../02/54.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:43 tx4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names צִיחָ֥א & חֲשׂוּפָ֖א & טַבָּעֽוֹת 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:44 vl6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־קֵרֹ֥ס בְּֽנֵי־סִֽיעֲהָ֖א בְּנֵ֥י פָדֽוֹן׃ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. If you continue the sentence from [2:43](../02/43.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Keros, Siaha, Padon,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:45 b5nu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־לְבָנָ֥ה בְנֵי־חֲגָבָ֖ה בְּנֵ֥י עַקּֽוּב׃ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. If you continue the sentence from [2:43](../02/43.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Lebanah, Hagabah, Akkub,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:46 qx4z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בְּנֵי־חָגָ֥ב בְּנֵי־שַׁלְמַ֖י בְּנֵ֥י חָנָֽן׃ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. If you continue the sentence from [2:43](../02/43.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Hagab, Shalmai, Hanan,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:47 qg3y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־גִדֵּ֥ל בְּנֵי־גַ֖חַר בְּנֵ֥י רְאָיָֽה׃ 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **sons** means descendants. If you continue the sentence from [2:43](../02/43.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Giddel, Gahar, Reaiah,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:47 qg3y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־גִדֵּ֥ל בְּנֵי־גַ֖חַר בְּנֵ֥י רְאָיָֽה׃ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. If you continue the sentence from [2:43](../02/43.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Giddel, Gahar, Reaiah,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:48 hw0m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־רְצִ֥ין בְּנֵי־נְקוֹדָ֖א בְּנֵ֥י גַזָּֽם׃ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. If you continue the sentence from [2:43](../02/43.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Rezin, Nekoda, Gazzam,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:49 csjh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־עֻזָּ֥א בְנֵי־פָסֵ֖חַ בְּנֵ֥י בֵסָֽי׃ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. If you continue the sentence from [2:43](../02/43.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Uzza, Paseah, Besai,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:50 pxdj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־אַסְנָ֥ה בְנֵי־מְעוּנִ֖ים בְּנֵ֥י נפיסים׃ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. If you continue the sentence from [2:43](../02/43.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Asnah, Meunim, Nephusim,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:51 fd31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־בַקְבּ֥וּק בְּנֵי־חֲקוּפָ֖א בְּנֵ֥י חַרְחֽוּר׃ 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **sons** means descendants. If you continue the sentence from [2:43](../02/43.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Bakbuk, Hakupha, Harhur,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:51 fd31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־בַקְבּ֥וּק בְּנֵי־חֲקוּפָ֖א בְּנֵ֥י חַרְחֽוּר׃ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. If you continue the sentence from [2:43](../02/43.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Bakbuk, Hakupha, Harhur,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:52 yoav rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־בַצְל֥וּת בְּנֵי־מְחִידָ֖א בְּנֵ֥י חַרְשָֽׁא׃ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. If you continue the sentence from [2:43](../02/43.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Bazluth, Mehida, Harsha,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:53 c1mt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־בַרְק֥וֹס בְּֽנֵי־סִֽיסְרָ֖א בְּנֵי־תָֽמַח׃ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. If you continue the sentence from [2:43](../02/43.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Barkos, Sisera, Temah,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:54 r7cn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֥י נְצִ֖יחַ בְּנֵ֥י חֲטִיפָֽא׃ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. If you continue the sentence from [2:43](../02/43.md), you can just list the names of these two men, and end the series in this verse. Alternate translation: “Neziah, and Hatipha” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:55 kd7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֖י עַבְדֵ֣י שְׁלֹמֹ֑ה 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “Some of the descendants of the laborers who had worked for the kingdom also returned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:55 kd7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֖י עַבְדֵ֣י שְׁלֹמֹ֑ה 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “Some of the descendants of the laborers who had worked for the kingdom also returned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:55 zx3k rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown עַבְדֵ֣י שְׁלֹמֹ֑ה 1 By **servants of Solomon**, this list does not mean officials who served in Solomon’s court. Rather, this phrase refers to people whom Solomon first conscripted as laborers. They were descendants of the groups that were living in the land of Canaan before the Israelites occupied it. They and their descendants remained conscripted laborers (slaves) under later kings. Alternate translation: “the laborers that King Solomon first conscripted” or “the laborers who had worked for the kingdom under Solomon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
2:55 vt3s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־סֹטַ֥י בְּנֵי־הַסֹּפֶ֖רֶת בְּנֵ֥י פְרוּדָֽא׃ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. Alternate translation: “they were from the descendants of Sotai, Hassophereth, Peruda,” beginning a series that will continue through [2:57](../02/57.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:55 rnfm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names סֹטַ֥י & הַסֹּפֶ֖רֶת & פְרוּדָֽא 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:56 jtpw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵי־יַעְלָ֥ה בְנֵי־דַרְק֖וֹן בְּנֵ֥י גִדֵּֽל׃ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. If you continue the sentence from [2:55](../02/55.md), you can just list the names of these three men. Alternate translation: “Jaalah, Darkon, Giddel,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:57 f1lh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בְּנֵ֧י שְׁפַטְיָ֣ה בְנֵֽי־חַטִּ֗יל בְּנֵ֛י פֹּכֶ֥רֶת הַצְּבָיִ֖ים בְּנֵ֥י אָמִֽי׃ 1 Here, **sons** means descendants. If you continue the sentence from [2:55](../02/55.md), you can just list the names of these four men, and end the series in this verse. Alternate translation: “Shephatiah, Hattil, Pochereth Hazzebaim, and Ami” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
2:58 y86d כָּ֨ל־הַנְּתִינִ֔ים וּבְנֵ֖י עַבְדֵ֣י שְׁלֹמֹ֑ה שְׁלֹ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת תִּשְׁעִ֥ים וּשְׁנָֽיִם 1 Alternate translation: “Altogether, 392 men returned who were descendants of temple servants or of laborers who had worked for the kingdom of Solomon”
|
||||
2:59 fa24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְאֵ֗לֶּה הָֽעֹלִים֙ 1 # General Information:\n\nAs in [2:1](../02/01.md), **went up** means traveled from Babylon back to Judah, since that involved going from a river valley up into the mountains. Alternate translation: “Some others returned to Judah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
2:59 fa24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom וְאֵ֗לֶּה הָֽעֹלִים֙ 1 As in [2:1](../02/01.md), **went up** means traveled from Babylon back to Judah, since that involved going from a river valley up into the mountains. Alternate translation: “Some others returned to Judah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
2:59 kgcj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מִתֵּ֥ל מֶ֨לַח֙ תֵּ֣ל חַרְשָׁ֔א כְּר֥וּב אַדָּ֖ן אִמֵּ֑ר 1 These are the names of five towns in Babylonia. Alternate translation: “who had been living in the towns of Tel Melah, Tel Harsha, Kerub, Addon, and Immer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
2:59 gd69 וְלֹ֣א יָֽכְל֗וּ לְהַגִּ֤יד 1 Alternate translation: “but they had no records to prove”
|
||||
2:59 ay8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism בֵּית־אֲבוֹתָם֙ וְזַרְעָ֔ם אִ֥ם מִיִּשְׂרָאֵ֖ל הֵֽם 1 All three of these phrases, **the house of their fathers**, **their seed**, and **whether they were from Israel**, mean very similar things. They are used together to give clarity and emphasis. The first phrase refers to a person being able to name a well-known ancestor. The second phrase refers to a person being able to list his ancestors going back to the one that is well-known. The third phrase summarizes the other two: if a person cannot name an ancestor or recite his ancestry, then he cannot claim to be from Israel. If there would be no distinction between these phrases in your language, you could combine them into one phrase. Alternate translations: “that their ancestors had been Israelites” or “what clan they were from or who their ancestors were, whether they were really Israelites” (See [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -209,7 +208,7 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
2:64 a73j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כָּל־הַקָּהָ֖ל כְּאֶחָ֑ד אַרְבַּ֣ע רִבּ֔וֹא אַלְפַּ֖יִם שְׁלֹשׁ־מֵא֥וֹת שִׁשִּֽׁים׃ 1 The expression **as one** means all together. Alternate translation: “The total number of men who returned was 42,360” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
2:65 w7yu מִ֠לְּבַד עַבְדֵיהֶ֤ם וְאַמְהֹֽתֵיהֶם֙ אֵ֔לֶּה שִׁבְעַ֣ת אֲלָפִ֔ים שְׁלֹ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים וְשִׁבְעָ֑ה 1 Alternate translation: “not counting their 7,337 male and female servants”
|
||||
2:65 i75w rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְלָהֶ֛ם מְשֹׁרְרִ֥ים וּֽמְשֹׁרְר֖וֹת מָאתָֽיִם 1 This group of those **who sang** is a different group from those in [2:41](../02/41.md). Those were Levites who sang in connection with Israel’s worship. The group here is a class of servants who were employed to provide music for public and private events. Alternate translation: “and the 200 male and female singers whom they employed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
2:66 t7kb סוּסֵיהֶ֕ם שְׁבַ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים וְשִׁשָּׁ֑ה פִּרְדֵיהֶ֕ם מָאתַ֖יִם אַרְבָּעִ֥ים וַחֲמִשָּֽׁה׃ 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation, beginning a sentence that will continue through the next verse: “The group also brought back with them 736 horses, 245 mules”
|
||||
2:66 t7kb סוּסֵיהֶ֕ם שְׁבַ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים וְשִׁשָּׁ֑ה פִּרְדֵיהֶ֕ם מָאתַ֖יִם אַרְבָּעִ֥ים וַחֲמִשָּֽׁה׃ 1 Alternate translation, beginning a sentence that will continue through the next verse: “The group also brought back with them 736 horses, 245 mules”
|
||||
2:67 mho1 גְּמַ֨לֵּיהֶ֔ם אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים וַחֲמִשָּׁ֑ה חֲמֹרִ֕ים שֵׁ֣שֶׁת אֲלָפִ֔ים שְׁבַ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת וְעֶשְׂרִֽים 1 Alternate translation, concluding the sentence from the previous verse: “435 camels, and 6,720 donkeys”
|
||||
2:68 aaer rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וּמֵרָאשֵׁי֙ 1 The word **and** introduces a new event in the story. Use the most natural way in your language to introduce this new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
2:68 r2vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis וּמֵרָאשֵׁי֙ הָֽאָב֔וֹת 1 Here, **heads of the fathers** is an abbreviated way of saying the heads of father’s houses. The full expression “house of their fathers” was used in [2:59](../02/59.md). See how you translated it there, and review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “some of the clan leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -335,7 +334,7 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
3:13 u6pc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְאֵ֣ין הָעָ֗ם מַכִּירִים֙ ק֚וֹל תְּרוּעַ֣ת הַשִּׂמְחָ֔ה לְק֖וֹל בְּכִ֣י הָעָ֑ם כִּ֣י הָעָ֗ם מְרִיעִים֙ תְּרוּעָ֣ה גְדוֹלָ֔ה 1 In its first occurrence here, the phrase **the people** means all the Israelites who had gathered for this ceremony. In its second occurrence, the phrase refers to one group of them, the older leaders who had seen the first temple and were weeping. In its third occurrence, it refers to another group of them, the younger Israelites who were shouting for joy. Alternate translation: “Because the people who were happy were shouting so loudly, no one at the ceremony could distinguish their cries from the sounds of the people who were weeping” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
3:13 rvdj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְהַקּ֥וֹל נִשְׁמַ֖ע עַד־לְמֵרָחֽוֹק 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the combined sound was so loud that those who lived far away from Jerusalem could hear it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
4:intro x878 0 # Ezra 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThe story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of the temple worship continues in this chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Helping to build the temple\n\nThe people of the surrounding nations offered to help to build the temple. It is unknown why the Jews refused their help, although it seems likely that the Jews considered these people to not truly belong to the people of God. These other people became their enemies and tried to hinder the work. They even persuaded the king of Persia to stop the Jews from building.
|
||||
4:1 v368 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background וַֽיִּשְׁמְע֔וּ 1 # General Information:\n\nThe word **Now** indicates that the sentence it introduces will provide background information that will be needed to understand what the book describes next. You can translate it with the word or phrase in your language that is most similar in meaning and significance. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
4:1 v368 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background וַֽיִּשְׁמְע֔וּ 1 The word **Now** indicates that the sentence it introduces will provide background information that will be needed to understand what the book describes next. You can translate it with the word or phrase in your language that is most similar in meaning and significance. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
4:1 miqb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification יְהוּדָ֖ה וּבִנְיָמִ֑ן 1 Here the book is referring to the people who came from the tribe of Judah as if they were a single person, their ancestor Judah. It is referring similarly to the people of the tribe of Benjamin as if they were a single person, their ancestor Benjamin. Alternate translation: “the people of the tribes of Judah and Benjamin” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||||
4:1 i4dx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys יְהוּדָ֖ה וּבִנְיָמִ֑ן 1 Here the book may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. Together the two words may be a way of referring to all of the Israelites, since at this point the community consisted essentially of people from the tribes of Judah and Benjamin. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||||
4:1 vflf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche וַֽיִּשְׁמְע֔וּ & כִּֽי־בְנֵ֤י הַגּוֹלָה֙ בּוֹנִ֣ים הֵיכָ֔ל 1 **Heard** means that these enemies learned by some means that the Jews were doing this. The book is using hearing, one means of discovering things, to describe the enemies learning this. Alternate translation: “Now … learned that the Jews who had returned from exile were building a temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -524,10 +523,10 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
5:7 tqh1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks לְדָרְיָ֥וֶשׁ מַלְכָּ֖א שְׁלָמָ֥א כֹֽלָּא 1 Here the book begins to quote the letter that Tattenai and his associates sent to King Darius. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
5:7 xf0z לְדָרְיָ֥וֶשׁ 1 **Darius** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [4:5](../04/05.md).
|
||||
5:7 mho8 שְׁלָמָ֥א כֹֽלָּא 1 As in [4:17](../04/17.md), this is a conventional greeting or good wish that senders at this time often included at the beginning of a letter. If your language has a similar expression that it uses for the same purpose, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “Greetings” or “We hope all is well with you”
|
||||
5:8 sp27 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person יְדִ֣יעַ ׀ לֶהֱוֵ֣א לְמַלְכָּ֗א 1 # General Information:\n\nThese officials address the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this respect by using an expression such as “O king.” Alternate translation: “We would like you to know, O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
5:8 wizf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive יְדִ֣יעַ ׀ לֶהֱוֵ֣א לְמַלְכָּ֗א 1 # General Information:\n\nIf it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “We would like you to know, O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
5:8 nv7q אֲזַ֜לְנָא לִיה֤וּד מְדִֽינְתָּא֙ 1 # General Information:\n\nAlternate translation: “we went to the province of Judah”
|
||||
5:8 avmn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לְבֵית֙ אֱלָהָ֣א רַבָּ֔א 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **the house** refers to the temple. The officials speak of it as if it were a place in which God would live. (They likely say **the great God** because the Jews told them, as they report in [5:11](../05/11.md), that it would be a temple for the God who made heaven and earth.) Alternate translation: “to the temple of the mighty God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
5:8 sp27 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person יְדִ֣יעַ ׀ לֶהֱוֵ֣א לְמַלְכָּ֗א 1 These officials address the king in the third person as a sign of respect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this respect by using an expression such as “O king.” Alternate translation: “We would like you to know, O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
5:8 wizf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive יְדִ֣יעַ ׀ לֶהֱוֵ֣א לְמַלְכָּ֗א 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “We would like you to know, O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
5:8 nv7q אֲזַ֜לְנָא לִיה֤וּד מְדִֽינְתָּא֙ 1 Alternate translation: “we went to the province of Judah”
|
||||
5:8 avmn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor לְבֵית֙ אֱלָהָ֣א רַבָּ֔א 1 Here, **the house** refers to the temple. The officials speak of it as if it were a place in which God would live. (They likely say **the great God** because the Jews told them, as they report in [5:11](../05/11.md), that it would be a temple for the God who made heaven and earth.) Alternate translation: “to the temple of the mighty God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
5:8 nmq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְה֤וּא מִתְבְּנֵא֙ אֶ֣בֶן גְּלָ֔ל וְאָ֖ע מִתְּשָׂ֣ם בְּכֻתְלַיָּ֑א 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say these things with active forms, and you could say who was doing these actions. Alternate translation: “the Jews are building the temple out of large stones and setting timber beams in the walls” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
5:8 cgiz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וַעֲבִ֥ידְתָּא דָ֛ךְ אָסְפַּ֥רְנָא מִתְעַבְדָ֖א וּמַצְלַ֥ח בְּיֶדְהֹֽם 1 You could say this with an active form, and you could say who was doing the action. The term **diligently**, used here and several more times in the book, means carefully, exactly, and efficiently. Alternate translation: “And they are doing the work carefully and efficiently and successfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
5:8 nzzw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּמַצְלַ֥ח בְּיֶדְהֹֽם 1 Here, **hand** represents control and action. Alternate translation: “and it is succeeding at their initiative” or “and they have been able to advance the work successfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -535,13 +534,13 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
5:9 p8jz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism מַן־שָׂ֨ם לְכֹ֜ם טְעֵ֗ם בַּיְתָ֤א דְנָה֙ לְמִבְנְיָ֔ה וְאֻשַּׁרְנָ֥א דְנָ֖ה לְשַׁכְלָלָֽה 1 See how you translated this question in [5:3](../05/03.md). The phrases **build this house** and **complete this structure** refer to the same action, not different actions. The officials say essentially the same thing twice for emphasis. If that would be confusing for your readers, you could say it once and provide emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “Who said that you could build a large temple such as this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
5:10 okji rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result וְאַ֧ף שְׁמָהָתְהֹ֛ם שְׁאֵ֥לְנָא לְּהֹ֖ם לְהוֹדָעוּתָ֑ךְ דִּ֛י נִכְתֻּ֥ב שֻׁם־גֻּבְרַיָּ֖א דִּ֥י בְרָאשֵׁיהֹֽם 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the reason before the result. (We do not know if Tattenai and his associates succeeded in writing down the list of names.) Alternate translation: “We wanted to write down the names of their leaders and to be prepared to let you know who they were, so we also asked them their names” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
5:10 qn28 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor גֻּבְרַיָּ֖א דִּ֥י בְרָאשֵׁיהֹֽם 1 Here, **head** is a figurative way of referring to a leader. Alternate translation: “the men who were their leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
5:11 f9fm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks אֲנַ֣חְנָא הִמּ֡וֹ עַבְדוֹהִי֩ דִֽי־אֱלָ֨הּ שְׁמַיָּ֜א וְאַרְעָ֗א 1 # General Information:\n\nStarting here, and through [5:16](../05/16.md), there is another quotation within a quotation. The book is quoting from the letter that Tattenai and his associates sent to King Darius, and within that letter, they are quoting what the Jewish elders told them in response to their question. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening secondary quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
5:11-16 f9fm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks אֲנַ֣חְנָא הִמּ֡וֹ עַבְדוֹהִי֩ דִֽי־אֱלָ֨הּ שְׁמַיָּ֜א וְאַרְעָ֗א 1 Starting here, and through [5:16](../05/16.md), there is another quotation within a quotation. The book is quoting from the letter that Tattenai and his associates sent to King Darius, and within that letter, they are quoting what the Jewish elders told them in response to their question. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening secondary quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
5:11 m5y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom אֲנַ֣חְנָא הִמּ֡וֹ עַבְדוֹהִי֩ דִֽי־אֱלָ֨הּ שְׁמַיָּ֜א וְאַרְעָ֗א 1 The Jewish leaders describe themselves as **servants** of God because they are speaking of a superior with humility and respect. However, in this context, the expression is also an idiom that indicates that this is the God whom they worship. Alternate translation: “We worship the God who created heaven and earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
5:11 r5fg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit אֱלָ֨הּ שְׁמַיָּ֜א וְאַרְעָ֗א 1 The implications of this phrase are that God created heaven and earth and therefore rightfully rules over them. Alternate translation: “is the God who created heaven and earth and rules over them.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
5:11 a1ui rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּבָנַ֤יִן בַּיְתָא֙ 1 **House** means the temple. This seems to be an abbreviated way of saying the “house of God,” a figurative description of the temple as the place where God lived. Alternate translation: “and we are rebuilding the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
5:11 y9hr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys וּמֶ֤לֶךְ לְיִשְׂרָאֵל֙ רַ֔ב בְּנָ֖הִי וְשַׁכְלְלֵֽהּ 1 In this section of the book, **completed** is another way of saying **built** when the two words are used together. (Review the note about this at [4:12](../04/12.md) if that would be helpful.) So the Jewish elders are expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with a single word. Alternate translation: “which a great king of Israel constructed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||||
5:12 mnpe rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast לָהֵ֗ן 1 The word **However** indicates that there will be a contrast between the sentence that it introduces and the previous one. This sentence expresses the opposite of what someone would hope and expect to happen after a great king built a temple for God, so you could begin the sentence with a word such as “unfortunately” to indicate this contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
|
||||
5:12 un5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִן־דִּ֨י הַרְגִּ֤זוּ אֲבָהֳתַ֨נָא֙ לֶאֱלָ֣הּ שְׁמַיָּ֔א 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **fathers** means ancestors. Alternate translation: “because our ancestors angered the God who rules in heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
5:12 un5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִן־דִּ֨י הַרְגִּ֤זוּ אֲבָהֳתַ֨נָא֙ לֶאֱלָ֣הּ שְׁמַיָּ֔א 1 Here, **fathers** means ancestors. Alternate translation: “because our ancestors angered the God who rules in heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
5:12 pqp8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor יְהַ֣ב הִמּ֔וֹ בְּיַ֛ד נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֥ר 1 Here, **hand** represents power and control. Alternate translation: “God allowed Nebuchadnezzar to conquer them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
5:12 cy4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy יְהַ֣ב הִמּ֔וֹ בְּיַ֛ד נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֥ר 1 Nebuchadnezzar alone did not conquer the kingdom of Judah. Rather, the elders are describing his armies by reference to something associated with them, the emperor who commanded them. Alternate translation: “God allowed them to be conquered by the armies of Nebuchadnezzar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
5:12 lfdn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֥ר מֶֽלֶךְ־בָּבֶ֖ל 1 **Nebuchadnezzar** is the name of a man, and **Babylon** is the name of the empire that he ruled. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -552,22 +551,22 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
5:13 fnbe rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּשְׁנַ֣ת חֲדָ֔ה לְכ֥וֹרֶשׁ 1 The original text uses a cardinal number here, **one**, but there is not a significant difference in meaning between that and the way it uses an ordinal number, “first,” in similar contexts elsewhere. If your language customarily uses ordinals for the numbers of years, you can do that here in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the first year of Cyrus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
5:13 t6xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names לְכ֥וֹרֶשׁ 1 **Cyrus** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [1:1](../01/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
5:13 g9o0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit מַלְכָּ֖א דִּ֣י בָבֶ֑ל 1 Cyrus was the king of the Persian Empire, but since under his leadership the Persians had conquered the Babylonians, he also had the right to use the title **king of Babylon**. The implication may be that as the heir and successor to the throne of Babylon, Cyrus had the same power over the temple as Nebuchadnezzar, and so he could order it to be rebuilt. Alternate translation: “who conquered Babylon.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
5:14 q6am וְ֠אַף מָאנַיָּ֣א דִֽי־בֵית־אֱלָהָא֮ דִּ֣י דַהֲבָ֣ה וְכַסְפָּא֒ דִּ֣י נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֗ר הַנְפֵּק֙ מִן־הֵֽיכְלָא֙ דִּ֣י בִֽירוּשְׁלֶ֔ם וְהֵיבֵ֣ל הִמּ֔וֹ לְהֵיכְלָ֖א דִּ֣י בָבֶ֑ל הַנְפֵּ֨ק הִמּ֜וֹ כּ֣וֹרֶשׁ מַלְכָּ֗א מִן־הֵֽיכְלָא֙ דִּ֣י בָבֶ֔ל וִיהִ֨יבוּ֙ לְשֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֣ר 1 # General Information:\n\nThis sentence may be hard for readers to follow because, in it, the direct object (that is, the thing that receives the action) comes first, and it consists of a very long phrase. If it would be helpful in your language, you could break this sentence into two sentences. Alternate translation: “Nebuchadnezzar had taken the gold and silver objects that were used in worship out of the temple in Jerusalem and brought them to the temple in Babylon. King Cyrus took them out of the temple in Babylon and gave them to … Sheshbazzar” See also the UST.
|
||||
5:14 ukn9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מָאנַיָּ֣א דִֽי־בֵית־אֱלָהָא֮ 1 # General Information:\n\nThis means specifically the bowls, basins, and other objects listed in [1:9–10](../01/09.md). These **vessels** were used during worship in the temple. Alternate translation: “the objects that were used in worship in the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
5:14 drht rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go וְהֵיבֵ֣ל 1 # General Information:\n\nIf it is more natural in your language, rather than **had brought**, you could say “had taken” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||||
5:14 qsv0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וִיהִ֨יבוּ֙ 1 # General Information:\n\nIf it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and Cyrus presented them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
5:14 q6am וְ֠אַף מָאנַיָּ֣א דִֽי־בֵית־אֱלָהָא֮ דִּ֣י דַהֲבָ֣ה וְכַסְפָּא֒ דִּ֣י נְבוּכַדְנֶצַּ֗ר הַנְפֵּק֙ מִן־הֵֽיכְלָא֙ דִּ֣י בִֽירוּשְׁלֶ֔ם וְהֵיבֵ֣ל הִמּ֔וֹ לְהֵיכְלָ֖א דִּ֣י בָבֶ֑ל הַנְפֵּ֨ק הִמּ֜וֹ כּ֣וֹרֶשׁ מַלְכָּ֗א מִן־הֵֽיכְלָא֙ דִּ֣י בָבֶ֔ל וִיהִ֨יבוּ֙ לְשֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֣ר 1 This sentence may be hard for readers to follow because, in it, the direct object (that is, the thing that receives the action) comes first, and it consists of a very long phrase. If it would be helpful in your language, you could break this sentence into two sentences. Alternate translation: “Nebuchadnezzar had taken the gold and silver objects that were used in worship out of the temple in Jerusalem and brought them to the temple in Babylon. King Cyrus took them out of the temple in Babylon and gave them to … Sheshbazzar” See also the UST.
|
||||
5:14 ukn9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown מָאנַיָּ֣א דִֽי־בֵית־אֱלָהָא֮ 1 This means specifically the bowls, basins, and other objects listed in [1:9–10](../01/09.md). These **vessels** were used during worship in the temple. Alternate translation: “the objects that were used in worship in the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
5:14 drht rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go וְהֵיבֵ֣ל 1 If it is more natural in your language, rather than **had brought**, you could say “had taken” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||||
5:14 qsv0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וִיהִ֨יבוּ֙ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and Cyrus presented them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
5:14 w7ix rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names לְשֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֣ר 1 **Sheshbazzar** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [1:8](../01/08.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
5:15 kwvp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וַאֲמַר 1 Here, **then** indicates that the event that the elders will now describe came after the events that they have just described. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this relationship. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||||
5:15 pdri rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns וַאֲמַר־לֵ֓הּ 1 This means “Then Cyrus said to Sheshbazzar.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
5:15 ebgs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes אֵ֚ל מָֽאנַיָּ֔א שֵׂ֚א אֵֽזֶל־אֲחֵ֣ת הִמּ֔וֹ בְּהֵיכְלָ֖א דִּ֣י בִירוּשְׁלֶ֑ם וּבֵ֥ית אֱלָהָ֖א יִתְבְּנֵ֥א עַל־אַתְרֵֽהּ 1 This is a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. The book is quoting from the letter that Tattenai and his associates sent to King Darius. Within that letter, they are quoting what the Jewish elders told them in response to their question. And within that response, the elders are quoting what King Cyrus told Sheshbazzar to do. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off this part of the verse within tertiary quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Another option would be to present this as an indirect quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||||
5:15 q6r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּבֵ֥ית אֱלָהָ֖א יִתְבְּנֵ֥א עַל־אַתְרֵֽהּ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “I authorize you to rebuild the temple on its original site” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
5:16 x9zt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential אֱדַ֨יִן֙ 1 # General Information:\n\nThe elders use the word **then** to indicate that the event they will now describe came after the events they have just described. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this relationship. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||||
5:16 batc שֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֣ר דֵּ֔ךְ אֲתָ֗א 1 # General Information:\n\nThe implication is that he came here, that is, from the perspective of the elders who are speaking, he came to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “that man named Sheshbazzar came here”
|
||||
5:16 e4ml rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יְהַ֧ב אֻשַּׁיָּ֛א 1 # General Information:\n\nSheshbazzar did not do the work himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to others who did the work, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
5:16 x9zt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential אֱדַ֨יִן֙ 1 The elders use the word **then** to indicate that the event they will now describe came after the events they have just described. In your translation, you can use the expression in your language that would best indicate this relationship. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||||
5:16 batc שֵׁשְׁבַּצַּ֣ר דֵּ֔ךְ אֲתָ֗א 1 The implication is that he came here, that is, from the perspective of the elders who are speaking, he came to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “that man named Sheshbazzar came here”
|
||||
5:16 e4ml rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יְהַ֧ב אֻשַּׁיָּ֛א 1 Sheshbazzar did not do the work himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to others who did the work, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
5:16 iuxm וּמִן־אֱדַ֧יִן וְעַד־כְּעַ֛ן מִתְבְּנֵ֖א וְלָ֥א שְׁלִֽם 1 # General Information:\n\nIn several places the book uses the terms **built and complete** together to mean “constructed.” (Review the note about this at [5:11](../05/11.md) if that would be helpful.) But this expression means something different here. Because there is a **not** before the second verb, here the expression means that the temple was only partially rebuilt, and then the work was interrupted. Be sure that your translation shows this difference. Alternate translation: “And ever since then, we have been trying to rebuild the temple, but we still have much work to do on it”
|
||||
5:16 d7m8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive מִתְבְּנֵ֖א וְלָ֥א שְׁלִֽם 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “we have been trying to rebuild the temple, but we still have much work to do on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
5:16 myr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks וְלָ֥א שְׁלִֽם 1 Here the letter ends its quotation of what the Jewish elders told Tattenai and his associates. If you decided in [5:11](../05/11.md) to mark their words as a secondary quotation, you should indicate that ending here with a closing secondary quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
5:17 f4m4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases וּכְעַ֞ן 1 # General Information:\n\nAs in [4:10](../04/10.md) and [4:11](../04/11.md), **and now** translates an Aramaic expression that introduces the main business of a letter. In this case, it comes near the end of the letter. If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
|
||||
5:17 f4m4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases וּכְעַ֞ן 1 As in [4:10](../04/10.md) and [4:11](../04/11.md), **and now** translates an Aramaic expression that introduces the main business of a letter. In this case, it comes near the end of the letter. If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
|
||||
5:17 kviz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom הֵ֧ן עַל־מַלְכָּ֣א טָ֗ב 1 This is an idiom that means “if the king thinks that this is a good idea” or “if this advice is acceptable to the king.” Alternate translation: “if it seems good to you, O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
5:17 hlsk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person הֵ֧ן עַל־מַלְכָּ֣א טָ֗ב 1 Tattenai and his associates address the king in third person as a form of respect. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the second person and indicate respect in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if it seems good to you, O king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
5:17 abm5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive יִ֠תְבַּקַּר 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “have your officials search” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -587,7 +586,7 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
6:2 gfa8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְהִשְׁתְּכַ֣ח & מְגִלָּ֣ה חֲדָ֑ה 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “As a result, the officials found one scroll” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
6:2 f8w5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בְּאַחְמְתָ֗א & דִּ֛י בְּמָדַ֥י מְדִינְתָּ֖ה 1 **Ecbatana** is the name of a city, and **Media** is the name of the province in which it was located. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
6:2 lrvg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וְכֵן־כְּתִ֥יב בְּגַוַּ֖הּ דִּכְרוֹנָֽה 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and the writing in the scroll said this” or “and the message in the scroll was”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
6:3 i2dk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks בִּשְׁנַ֨ת חֲדָ֜ה לְכ֣וֹרֶשׁ מַלְכָּ֗א 1 # General Information:\n\nHere the book begins to quote what was said on the scroll that the officials found in Ecbatana. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
6:3 i2dk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks בִּשְׁנַ֨ת חֲדָ֜ה לְכ֣וֹרֶשׁ מַלְכָּ֗א 1 Here the book begins to quote what was said on the scroll that the officials found in Ecbatana. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
6:3 ev3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בִּשְׁנַ֨ת חֲדָ֜ה לְכ֣וֹרֶשׁ מַלְכָּ֗א 1 The Hebrew uses a cardinal number here, **one**, but there is not a significant difference in meaning between that and the way the Hebrew uses an ordinal number, “first,” in similar contexts elsewhere. If your language customarily uses ordinals for the numbers of years, you can do that here in your translation. Alternate translation: “In the first year of the reign of Cyrus as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
6:3 lyht rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names לְכ֣וֹרֶשׁ 1 **Cyrus** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [1:1](../01/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
6:3 gi3x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks בַּיְתָ֣א יִתְבְּנֵ֔א 1 Starting here, and through [6:5](../06/05.md), there is a quotation within a quotation. The book is quoting from the scroll that the officials found in Ecbatana, and within that scroll, the royal chronicles quote the decree of Cyrus. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening secondary quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -606,16 +605,16 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
6:5 dwxb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וְתַחֵ֖ת בְּבֵ֥ית אֱלָהָֽא 1 It may be that the sudden change to second person singular **you** here is because the document is quoting Cyrus's words, which may have been spoken to Sheshbazzar (See [5:14](../05/14.md)). If this is confusing in your language, you can use the third person. Alternate translation: “So these things must be returned to the house of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
6:5 vo0d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks וְתַחֵ֖ת בְּבֵ֥ית אֱלָהָֽא 1 Here the scroll ends its quotation from the decree of Cyrus. If you decided in the middle of [6:3](../06/03.md) to mark these words as a quotation within a quotation, you should indicate that ending here with a closing secondary quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
6:5 xrzz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks וְתַחֵ֖ת בְּבֵ֥ית אֱלָהָֽא 1 Here, the text also ends its quotation from the scroll. If you decided at the start of [6:3](../06/03.md) to mark its words as a quotation, you should indicate that ending here with a closing primary quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
6:6 f9x5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis כְּעַ֡ן תַּ֠תְּנַי 1 # General Information:\n\nHere the book leaves out some of the material that a story would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Rather than repeating the same information from the scroll, but now as a letter to the officials, it jumps right from its quotation from the scroll that was discovered at Ecbatana and into the letter that King Darius wrote to Tattenai and his associates in response to what the scroll said. You could say this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “When King Darius learned from the scroll that Cyrus had ordered the temple to be rebuilt, he sent Tattenai and his associates a letter in answer to their inquiry. He told them what he had learned from the scroll and then warned them, ‘Now Tattenai’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
6:6 ks97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks כְּעַ֡ן 1 # General Information:\n\nSince the book here begins to quote the letter that King Darius sent in reply to Tattenai and his associates, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
6:6 wtim rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases כְּעַ֡ן 1 # General Information:\n\nAs in [4:13](../04/13.md), [4:14](../04/14.md), and [4:21](../04/21.md), **now** introduces an important point within a letter. (It is similar to the expression “and now” in [4:10](../04/10.md), [4:11](../04/11.md), [4:17](../04/17.md), and [5:17](../05/17.md).) If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
|
||||
6:6 qpqv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person תַּ֠תְּנַי פַּחַ֨ת עֲבַֽר־נַהֲרָ֜ה שְׁתַ֤ר בּוֹזְנַי֙ וּכְנָוָ֣תְה֔וֹן אֲפַרְסְכָיֵ֔א דִּ֖י בַּעֲבַ֣ר נַהֲרָ֑ה רַחִיקִ֥ין הֲו֖וֹ מִן־תַּמָּֽה 1 # General Information:\n\nSince Darius addresses these men directly at the end of the sentence, instead of **their companions**, in the third person, we would expect him to say “your companions,” in the second person. So it seems that the book is compressing the letter as it quotes it. Based on the other letters that the book quotes in [4:11–16](../04/11.md), [4:17–22](../04/17.md), and [5:7–17](../05/07.md), the full letter probably said something like “To Tattenai, the governor of Beyond-the-River, Shethar-Bozenai, and their companions, the officials who are in Beyond-the-River. Peace. And now,” followed by an explanation that the court officials had discovered a scroll that recorded the decree of Cyrus. Then would follow instructions to these men, beginning “Be far away from there!” But since the quotation from this letter in the book jumps from the list of the recipients’ names right to these instructions, If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person throughout. Alternate translation: “Tattenai, the governor of Beyond-the-River, Shethar-Bozenai, and your associates, you officials who are in Beyond-the-River: Be far away from there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
6:6 f9x5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis כְּעַ֡ן תַּ֠תְּנַי 1 Here the book leaves out some of the material that a story would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Rather than repeating the same information from the scroll, but now as a letter to the officials, it jumps right from its quotation from the scroll that was discovered at Ecbatana and into the letter that King Darius wrote to Tattenai and his associates in response to what the scroll said. You could say this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “When King Darius learned from the scroll that Cyrus had ordered the temple to be rebuilt, he sent Tattenai and his associates a letter in answer to their inquiry. He told them what he had learned from the scroll and then warned them, ‘Now Tattenai’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
6:6 ks97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks כְּעַ֡ן 1 Since the book here begins to quote the letter that King Darius sent in reply to Tattenai and his associates, it may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||||
6:6 wtim rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases כְּעַ֡ן 1 As in [4:13](../04/13.md), [4:14](../04/14.md), and [4:21](../04/21.md), **now** introduces an important point within a letter. (It is similar to the expression “and now” in [4:10](../04/10.md), [4:11](../04/11.md), [4:17](../04/17.md), and [5:17](../05/17.md).) If your language has a comparable expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
|
||||
6:6 qpqv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person תַּ֠תְּנַי פַּחַ֨ת עֲבַֽר־נַהֲרָ֜ה שְׁתַ֤ר בּוֹזְנַי֙ וּכְנָוָ֣תְה֔וֹן אֲפַרְסְכָיֵ֔א דִּ֖י בַּעֲבַ֣ר נַהֲרָ֑ה רַחִיקִ֥ין הֲו֖וֹ מִן־תַּמָּֽה 1 Since Darius addresses these men directly at the end of the sentence, instead of **their companions**, in the third person, we would expect him to say “your companions,” in the second person. So it seems that the book is compressing the letter as it quotes it. Based on the other letters that the book quotes in [4:11–16](../04/11.md), [4:17–22](../04/17.md), and [5:7–17](../05/07.md), the full letter probably said something like “To Tattenai, the governor of Beyond-the-River, Shethar-Bozenai, and their companions, the officials who are in Beyond-the-River. Peace. And now,” followed by an explanation that the court officials had discovered a scroll that recorded the decree of Cyrus. Then would follow instructions to these men, beginning “Be far away from there!” But since the quotation from this letter in the book jumps from the list of the recipients’ names right to these instructions, If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person throughout. Alternate translation: “Tattenai, the governor of Beyond-the-River, Shethar-Bozenai, and your associates, you officials who are in Beyond-the-River: Be far away from there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
6:6 xd9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names תַּ֠תְּנַי & שְׁתַ֤ר בּוֹזְנַי֙ 1 These are the names of two men. See how you translated them in [5:3](../05/03.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
6:6 xk9x וּכְנָוָ֣תְה֔וֹן 1 Alternate translation: “and their associates” or “and your associates”
|
||||
6:6 akg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor רַחִיקִ֥ין הֲו֖וֹ מִן־תַּמָּֽה 1 King Darius uses a spatial metaphor to indicate that he wants Tattenai and his associates not to interfere with what the Jews are doing in Jerusalem. The meaning is not simply that they are to stay away physically from that area, since they could still plot against the Jews from a distance (for example, by bribing officials in the royal court, as [4:5](../04/05.md) describes). Alternate translation: “do not interfere with what is happening in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
6:7 k1ks rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism שְׁבֻ֕קוּ לַעֲבִידַ֖ת בֵּית־אֱלָהָ֣א דֵ֑ךְ 1 This sentence means basically the same thing as the last sentence in [6:6](../06/06.md). Darius says essentially the same thing twice for emphasis. If that would be confusing for your readers, you could combine the two sentences and express the emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation for both sentences: “do not interfere with the rebuilding of the temple in Jerusalem in any way” However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. The second phrase is more specific. It says precisely what Darius wants these Samaritan officials to leave alone. Alternate translation: “Do not interfere with what is happening in Jerusalem. Do not disturb the work on the temple there!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||||
6:7 xw40 בֵּית־אֱלָהָ֥א דֵ֖ךְ יִבְנ֥וֹן עַל־אַתְרֵֽהּ 1 As in [5:15](../05/15.md), this expression means “Let … rebuild the temple on its original site.” You could say that as an alternate translation.
|
||||
6:8 ci97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּמִנִּי֮ שִׂ֣ים טְעֵם֒ לְמָ֣א דִֽי־תַֽעַבְד֗וּן עִם־שָׂבֵ֤י יְהוּדָיֵא֙ אִלֵּ֔ךְ לְמִבְנֵ֖א בֵּית־אֱלָהָ֣א דֵ֑ךְ 1 # General Information:\n\nIf it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “This is what I am commanding you to do to help the elders of the Jews rebuild that temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
6:8 ci97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּמִנִּי֮ שִׂ֣ים טְעֵם֒ לְמָ֣א דִֽי־תַֽעַבְד֗וּן עִם־שָׂבֵ֤י יְהוּדָיֵא֙ אִלֵּ֔ךְ לְמִבְנֵ֖א בֵּית־אֱלָהָ֣א דֵ֑ךְ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “This is what I am commanding you to do to help the elders of the Jews rebuild that temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
6:8 njb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּמִנִּכְסֵ֣י מַלְכָּ֗א דִּ֚י מִדַּת֙ עֲבַ֣ר נַהֲרָ֔ה אָסְפַּ֗רְנָא נִפְקְתָ֛א תֶּהֱוֵ֧א מִֽתְיַהֲבָ֛א לְגֻבְרַיָּ֥א אִלֵּ֖ךְ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “I want you officials to carefully pay the full costs of the rebuilding from the royal treasury from the tribute that you receive in Beyond-the-River province” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
6:8 te7b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person וּמִנִּכְסֵ֣י מַלְכָּ֗א 1 Darius speaks of himself here in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “And from my royal revenue” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
6:8 xfsc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes דִּי־לָ֥א לְבַטָּלָֽא 1 Here, **it** means the work of rebuilding the temple. Darius is using a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word, **not**, together with a word, **stop**, that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “in order to make sure that the rebuilding is completed successfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -632,8 +631,8 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
6:10 xq28 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person לְחַיֵּ֥י מַלְכָּ֖א וּבְנֽוֹהִי 1 Darius speaks of himself here in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “that God will preserve my life and the life of my sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
6:10 ej11 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche לְחַיֵּ֥י מַלְכָּ֖א וּבְנֽוֹהִי 1 The king is speaking of the quality of his life and that of his sons, not just that they will live. Alternate translation: “that all will be well for me and my sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
6:10 a820 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּבְנֽוֹהִי 1 Here, **sons** could mean one of two things. (1) It could be literal and mean the biological sons of King Darius. (2) It could be figurative and mean descendants, specifically those whom Darius hoped would succeed him on the throne. As the note to [4:15](../04/15.md) explains, the Persian kings spoke of predecessor kings as their “fathers,” so they may also have spoken of successor kings as their “sons.” Alternate translation: “his successors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
6:11 em18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּמִנִּי֮ שִׂ֣ים טְעֵם֒ דִּ֣י 1 # General Information:\n\nIf it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and I am commanding that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
6:11 zdzd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כָל־אֱנָ֗שׁ דִּ֤י יְהַשְׁנֵא֙ פִּתְגָמָ֣א דְנָ֔ה 1 # General Information:\n\nThe phrase **any man who changes this edict** could mean giving different instructions from what the king had commanded, but it could also mean doing something against what his edict commands. [6:12](../06/12.md) suggests that changing the edict means destroying the temple rather than ensuring that it was rebuilt and maintained. Alternate translation: “if anyone disobeys this edict” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
6:11 em18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive וּמִנִּי֮ שִׂ֣ים טְעֵם֒ דִּ֣י 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and I am commanding that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
6:11 zdzd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom כָל־אֱנָ֗שׁ דִּ֤י יְהַשְׁנֵא֙ פִּתְגָמָ֣א דְנָ֔ה 1 The phrase **any man who changes this edict** could mean giving different instructions from what the king had commanded, but it could also mean doing something against what his edict commands. [6:12](../06/12.md) suggests that changing the edict means destroying the temple rather than ensuring that it was rebuilt and maintained. Alternate translation: “if anyone disobeys this edict” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
6:11 uqt8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit יִתְנְסַ֥ח אָע֙ מִן־בַּיְתֵ֔הּ וּזְקִ֖יף יִתְמְחֵ֣א עֲלֹ֑הִי 1 This is an implicit reference to one form of capital punishment that the Persians used. Darius assumes that the officials know what he means. Anyone who violates his order is to be lifted up and impaled on a beam of wood from his own house. That is, one end of the beam is to be sharpened so that it will pass through the body of the offender, the other end is to be planted in the ground, and he is to be impaled on the beam. Alternate translation: “pull a beam out of his house, sharpen one end, and lift him up and impale him on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
6:11 w334 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּבַיְתֵ֛הּ נְוָל֥וּ יִתְעֲבֵ֖ד עַל־דְּנָֽה 1 The expression **rubbish heap** means that the house would be so thoroughly destroyed that it would look like a garbage dump. The former site of the house would not necessarily be used as an actual dump. Alternate translation: “and as a further punishment for violating my order, I command you to demolish his house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
6:11 i9yf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive יִתְנְסַ֥ח אָע֙ מִן־בַּיְתֵ֔הּ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “you must pull a beam out of his house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -716,10 +715,9 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
6:22 x9ls מֶֽלֶךְ־אַשּׁוּר֙ 1 This phrase actually refers to Darius, the king of Persia. But since the Persian Empire was the heir to the Assyrian Empire, Darius could be addressed by this title as well. (See the note to [4:15](../04/15.md) that explains that the Persian kings considered their “fathers” or predecessor kings to include the Assyrian and Babylonian kings whose empires they had absorbed.) Alternate translation: “King Darius of Persia”
|
||||
6:22 m7l7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 As in [4:1](../04/01.md), this phrase provides further background information about who Yahweh is. In context, it helps distinguish Yahweh from the gods of the nations of the land. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, the God whom the people of Israel worshiped” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
|
||||
7:intro p3he 0 # Ezra 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n### Possible title: Ezra begins his religious reforms\n\n### Ezra's geneology\n\nEzra’s genealogy in [7:1–5](../07/01.md) traces Ezra back to Aaron in a list of 16 ancestors. As is common in ancient genealogies, this list almost certainly does not include all of the generations between Aaron and Ezra. Aaron ([7:5](../07/05.md)) was the first high priest under the law of Moses and the first to serve in the tabernacle. Azariah ([7:3](../07/03.md)) was the first high priest to serve in the temple that Solomon built, which this book describes in [5:11](../05/11.md). Seraiah was the last high priest to serve in that temple. The Babylonians executed him when they conquered Jerusalem and destroyed the temple. The names in the list are arranged so that there will be seven generations between Aaron and Azariah, and seven generations between Azariah and Ezra, with Seraiah listed as the last generation before Ezra. If you have the freedom to use formatting creatively in your translation, you could make the implicit information about Aaron, Azariah, and Seraiah explicit and format this genealogy in a way that will highlight its purpose and design. Alternate translation and formatting for verse 1 through the first 2 words of verse 6:\n\nEzra—\n\nthe descendant of Seraiah, the last high priest in Solomon’s temple,\nthe son of Azariah,\nthe son of Hilkiah,\nthe son of Shallum,\nthe son of Zadok,\nthe descendant of Ahitub,\nthe descendant of Amariah,\n\nthe son of Azariah, the first high priest in Solomon’s temple,\n\nthe descendant of Meraioth,\nthe son of Zerahiah,\nthe son of Uzzi,\nthe son of Bukki,\nthe son of Abishua,\nthe son of Phinehas,\nthe son of Eleazar,\n\nthe son of Aaron, the first high priest in the tabernacle\n\n—this Ezra\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### God’s Law\n\nThe people no longer know the law of Moses. Therefore, the king allows Ezra to return to Judea to teach the people about God’s law. Many people go with him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])
|
||||
7:1 h549 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וְאַחַר֙ הַדְּבָרִ֣ים הָאֵ֔לֶּה 1 # General Information:\n\nThis phrase, common in Hebrew storytelling, indicates that the book will now relate events that occurred some time after the events that it had been describing. The book had been describing the time when the Jews finished rebuilding the temple, [6:15](../06/15.md), which was the sixth year of the reign of Darius. Now it will describe events beginning during the seventh year of the reign of Artaxerxes, who was the grandson of Darius. So nearly sixty years went by between the end of chapter 6 and the beginning of chapter 7. If your language has a similar phrase that can indicate the passage of time like this, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
7:1 qol2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֣סְתְּא 1 # General Information:\n\n**Artaxerxes** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [4:7](../04/07.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
7:1 u6xs rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names עֶזְרָא֙ 1 # General Information:\n\n**Ezra** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
7:1 hixh rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants עֶזְרָא֙ 1 # General Information:\n\nHere the book introduces a new, important person. Use a natural way in your language to do this. Also, since the sentence that begins here extends through verse 6, it may be helpful to your readers to make this first part of verse 1 into a complete sentence and begin another sentence with the list of Ezra's ancestors, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||||
7:1 h549 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וְאַחַר֙ הַדְּבָרִ֣ים הָאֵ֔לֶּה 1 This phrase, common in Hebrew storytelling, indicates that the book will now relate events that occurred some time after the events that it had been describing. The book had been describing the time when the Jews finished rebuilding the temple, [6:15](../06/15.md), which was the sixth year of the reign of Darius. Now it will describe events beginning during the seventh year of the reign of Artaxerxes, who was the grandson of Darius. So nearly sixty years went by between the end of chapter 6 and the beginning of chapter 7. If your language has a similar phrase that can indicate the passage of time like this, you can use that in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
7:1 qol2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֣סְתְּא 1 **Artaxerxes** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [4:7](../04/07.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
7:1 hixh rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants עֶזְרָא֙ 1 Here the book introduces a new, important person. Use a natural way in your language to do this. Also, since the sentence that begins here extends through verse 6, it may be helpful to your readers to make this first part of verse 1 into a complete sentence and begin another sentence with the list of Ezra's ancestors, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||||
7:1 n9di rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor בֶּן־שְׂרָיָ֔ה בֶּן־עֲזַרְיָ֖ה בֶּן־חִלְקִיָּֽה 1 In general, in the list in [7:1–5](../07/01.md), **son** means descendant. However, in many cases a man actually is the biological son of the next man on the list. So for your translation, you will need to decide whether to use the figurative expression **son**, which can also be literally true in many cases, or the plain expression “descendant,” which is true in every case, or to say “son” for actual sons and “descendant” for descendants who are not actual sons. Choosing that last option would help to show that the men on the list have been selected to make a certain number and arrangement, as explained in the chapter introduction. Alternative translations will illustrate this last option for each verse. Here, Alternate translation: “the descendant of Seraiah, the son of Azariah, the son of Hilkiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
7:1 gcr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names שְׂרָיָ֔ה & עֲזַרְיָ֖ה & חִלְקִיָּֽה 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
7:2 iy78 בֶּן־שַׁלּ֥וּם בֶּן־צָד֖וֹק בֶּן־אֲחִיטֽוּב 1 Alternate translation: “the son of Shallum, the son of Zadok, the descendant of Ahitub”
|
||||
|
|
@ -873,11 +871,11 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
7:28 gxx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis מִיִּשְׂרָאֵ֛ל רָאשִׁ֖ים 1 As [8:1](../08/01.md) shows, **heads** here is an abbreviated way of saying **heads of father’s houses**. Alternate translation: “some Israelite clan leaders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
7:28 agha rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom לַעֲל֥וֹת עִמִּֽי 1 Ezra says **go up** because he and the group he was leading would have to travel from a river valley up into the mountains in order to return from their places of exile to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to return to Jerusalem with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
8:intro ye9m 0 # Ezra 8 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The people’s return to Judah\n\nMany people went back to Judah with Ezra. They trusted God to protect them and the precious items that they carried with them, which had been given for the temple. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])
|
||||
8:1 wwtp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וְאֵ֛לֶּה 1 # General Information:\n\nThe word **Now** introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural method in your language to introduce a new event here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
8:1 ss8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis וְאֵ֛לֶּה רָאשֵׁ֥י אֲבֹתֵיהֶ֖ם וְהִתְיַחְשָׂ֑ם הָעֹלִ֣ים עִמִּ֗י 1 # General Information:\n\nAs in [4:3](../04/03.md), **heads of their fathers** is an abbreviated way of saying “heads of their father’s houses.” Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “These are the names of the clan leaders, along with the names of their clans, of those who traveled with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
8:1 u9yy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom הָעֹלִ֣ים עִמִּ֗י & מִבָּבֶֽל 1 # General Information:\n\nAs in [7:28](../07/28.md), Ezra says **go up** because the trip from Babylon to Jerusalem would involve a significant climb in elevation. Alternate translation: “who returned from Babylon with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
8:1 f1jb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּמַלְכ֛וּת אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֥סְתְּא הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 # General Information:\n\nAs [7:8–9](../07/08.md) indicates, this was specifically in the seventh year of the reign of Artaxerxes. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “during the seventh year of the reign of Artaxerxes as king of Persia.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
8:1 e7pk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בְּמַלְכ֛וּת אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֥סְתְּא הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 # General Information:\n\nIf you choose to make explicit the information of which year this is of the king's reign, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can say “during year seven of the reign of Artaxerxes as king of Persia.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
8:1 wwtp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent וְאֵ֛לֶּה 1 The word **Now** introduces a new event in the story. Use a natural method in your language to introduce a new event here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
8:1 ss8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis וְאֵ֛לֶּה רָאשֵׁ֥י אֲבֹתֵיהֶ֖ם וְהִתְיַחְשָׂ֑ם הָעֹלִ֣ים עִמִּ֗י 1 As in [4:3](../04/03.md), **heads of their fathers** is an abbreviated way of saying “heads of their father’s houses.” Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “These are the names of the clan leaders, along with the names of their clans, of those who traveled with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
8:1 u9yy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom הָעֹלִ֣ים עִמִּ֗י & מִבָּבֶֽל 1 As in [7:28](../07/28.md), Ezra says **go up** because the trip from Babylon to Jerusalem would involve a significant climb in elevation. Alternate translation: “who returned from Babylon with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
8:1 f1jb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit בְּמַלְכ֛וּת אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֥סְתְּא הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 As [7:8–9](../07/08.md) indicates, this was specifically in the seventh year of the reign of Artaxerxes. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “during the seventh year of the reign of Artaxerxes as king of Persia.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
8:1 e7pk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal בְּמַלְכ֛וּת אַרְתַּחְשַׁ֥סְתְּא הַמֶּ֖לֶךְ 1 If you choose to make explicit the information of which year this is of the king's reign, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can say “during year seven of the reign of Artaxerxes as king of Persia.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||||
8:2 m2b9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִבְּנֵ֤י פִֽינְחָס֙ גֵּֽרְשֹׁ֔ם 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Phinehas, Gershom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
8:2 t1dg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פִֽינְחָס֙ גֵּֽרְשֹׁ֔ם 1 These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
8:2 i7e9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִבְּנֵ֥י אִיתָמָ֖ר דָּנִיֵּ֑אל 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Ithamar, Daniel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -889,7 +887,7 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
8:3 f6xt rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names שְׁכַנְיָ֔ה & פַרְעֹ֖שׁ זְכַרְיָ֑ה 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
8:3 ds2y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְעִמּ֛וֹ הִתְיַחֵ֥שׂ לִזְכָרִ֖ים מֵאָ֥ה וַחֲמִשִּֽׁים 1 The implication is that these 150 males belonged to the same clan as Zechariah. Alternate translation: “along with 150 other men from his clan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
8:4 f7d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִבְּנֵי֙ פַּחַ֣ת מוֹאָ֔ב אֶלְיְהֽוֹעֵינַ֖י בֶּן־זְרַֽחְיָ֑ה 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants,” but **son** most likely means a biological son. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Pahath-Moab, Eliehoenai the son of Zerahiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
8:4 c961 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פַּחַ֣ת מוֹאָ֔ב אֶלְיְהֽוֹעֵינַ֖י & זְרַֽחְיָ֑ה 1 # General Information:\n\nThese are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
8:4 c961 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names פַּחַ֣ת מוֹאָ֔ב אֶלְיְהֽוֹעֵינַ֖י & זְרַֽחְיָ֑ה 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
8:4 y6jz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְעִמּ֖וֹ מָאתַ֥יִם הַזְּכָרִֽים 1 See the note to [8:3](../08/03.md) about this expression. Alternate translation: “along with 200 men from his clan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
8:5 qrqj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִבְּנֵ֥י שְׁכַנְיָ֖ה בֶּן־יַחֲזִיאֵ֑ל 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants,” but **son** most likely means a biological son. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Shecaniah, the son of Jahaziel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
8:5 sxis rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants מִבְּנֵ֥י שְׁכַנְיָ֖ה בֶּן־יַחֲזִיאֵ֑ל 1 Since this list has been providing the name of each clan leader, it would be unusual for it to omit the leader’s name here and state only the name of his father. Most scholars believe that the name of the clan leader was accidentally left out at one point in the copying process. Other ancient versions of the Old Testament read, “from the sons of Zattu, Shecaniah the son of Jahaziel.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could follow those versions and include the following footnote: “The name Zattu appears in the ancient Greek and other ancient versions.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Zattu, Shecaniah the son of Jahaziel” If you want to translate only what is in the Hebrew, you could follow the ULT or translate, “From the descendants of Shecaniah, the son of Jahaziel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -901,8 +899,8 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
8:7 yegf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּמִבְּנֵ֣י עֵילָ֔ם יְשַֽׁעְיָ֖ה בֶּן־עֲתַלְיָ֑ה 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants,” but **son** most likely means a biological son. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Elam, Jeshaiah the son of Athaliah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
8:7 w1un rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names עֵילָ֔ם יְשַֽׁעְיָ֖ה & עֲתַלְיָ֑ה 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
8:7 f2s8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְעִמּ֖וֹ שִׁבְעִ֥ים הַזְּכָרִֽים 1 See the note to [8:3](../08/03.md) about this expression. Alternate translation: “along with 70 men from his clan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
8:8 wa5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּמִבְּנֵ֣י שְׁפַטְיָ֔ה זְבַדְיָ֖ה בֶּן־מִֽיכָאֵ֑ל 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **sons** means “descendants,” but **son** most likely means a biological son. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Shephatiah, Zebadiah the son of Michael” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
8:8 b23z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names שְׁפַטְיָ֔ה זְבַדְיָ֖ה & מִֽיכָאֵ֑ל 1 # General Information:\n\nThese are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
8:8 wa5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּמִבְּנֵ֣י שְׁפַטְיָ֔ה זְבַדְיָ֖ה בֶּן־מִֽיכָאֵ֑ל 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants,” but **son** most likely means a biological son. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Shephatiah, Zebadiah the son of Michael” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
8:8 b23z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names שְׁפַטְיָ֔ה זְבַדְיָ֖ה & מִֽיכָאֵ֑ל 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
8:8 w6u1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְעִמּ֖וֹ שְׁמֹנִ֥ים הַזְּכָרִֽים 1 See the note to [8:3](../08/03.md) about this expression. Alternate translation: “along with 80 men from his clan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
8:9 w699 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִבְּנֵ֣י יוֹאָ֔ב עֹבַדְיָ֖ה בֶּן־יְחִיאֵ֑ל 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants,” but **son** most likely means a biological son. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Joab, Obadiah the son of Jehiel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
8:9 u1te rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names יוֹאָ֔ב עֹבַדְיָ֖ה & יְחִיאֵ֑ל 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -915,14 +913,14 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
8:11 ywsh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בֵבַ֔י זְכַרְיָ֖ה & בֵּבָ֑י 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
8:11 w892 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְעִמּ֕וֹ עֶשְׂרִ֥ים וּשְׁמֹנָ֖ה הַזְּכָרִֽים 1 See the note to [8:3](../08/03.md) about this expression. Alternate translation: “along with 28 men from his clan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
8:12 a3dx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּמִבְּנֵ֣י עַזְגָּ֔ד יוֹחָנָ֖ן בֶּן־הַקָּטָ֑ן 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants,” but **son** most likely means a biological son. Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Azgad, Johanan the son of Hakkatan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
8:12 z7xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names עַזְגָּ֔ד יוֹחָנָ֖ן & הַקָּטָ֑ן 1 # General Information:\n\nThese are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
8:12 z7xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names עַזְגָּ֔ד יוֹחָנָ֖ן & הַקָּטָ֑ן 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
8:12 j4bn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְעִמּ֕וֹ מֵאָ֥ה וַעֲשָׂרָ֖ה הַזְּכָרִֽים 1 See the note to [8:3](../08/03.md) about this expression. Alternate translation: “along with 110 men from his clan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
8:13 rzr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּמִבְּנֵ֣י אֲדֹנִיקָם֮ אַחֲרֹנִים֒ וְאֵ֣לֶּה שְׁמוֹתָ֔ם אֱלִיפֶ֖לֶט יְעִיאֵ֣ל וּֽשְׁמַעְיָ֑ה 1 The implication is that some descendants of Adonikam had still remained in Babylon even after a large number of his descendants returned to Judah with Zerubbabel some time before this, as [2:13](../02/13.md) describes. The term **last** here indicates that these who had remained in Babylon now came with Ezra. Alternate translation: “And from the descendants of Adonikam who had remained in Babylon, the family leaders Eliphelet, Jeuel, and Shemaiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
8:13 k1ic rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֲדֹנִיקָם֮ & אֱלִיפֶ֖לֶט יְעִיאֵ֣ל וּֽשְׁמַעְיָ֑ה 1 These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
8:13 hu49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְעִמָּהֶ֖ם שִׁשִּׁ֥ים הַזְּכָרִֽים 1 See the note to [8:3](../08/03.md) about this expression. Alternate translation: “along with 60 men from their clan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
8:14 p7ej rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּמִבְּנֵ֥י בִגְוַ֖י עוּתַ֣י וְזַכּ֑וּר 1 **Sons** here means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Bigvai, Uthai and Zaccur” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
8:14 we81 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וְעִמּ֖וֹ שִׁבְעִ֥ים הַזְּכָרִֽים 1 See the note to [8:3](../08/03.md) about this expression. Here, **him** actually refers to both Uthai and Zaccur, so you can use a plural pronoun in your translation, if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “along with 70 men from their clan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
8:15 zfwz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וָֽאֶקְבְּצֵ֗ם אֶל־הַנָּהָר֙ הַבָּ֣א אֶֽל־אַהֲוָ֔א וַנַּחֲנֶ֥ה שָׁ֖ם יָמִ֣ים שְׁלֹשָׁ֑ה 1 # General Information:\n\n**Them** means everyone listed in [8:2–14](../08/02.md), everyone who would be traveling with Ezra. The implication is that they all packed for the trip and set out from their homes, but then assembled at a location outside of the city of Babylon where Ezra could make sure the group was ready for the trip. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I had everyone who was going to be traveling with me assemble on the banks of the river that flows from Babylon to Ahava. We camped there for three days so that I could make sure that we had enough temple personnel with us and that we could transport the gold and silver safely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
8:15 zfwz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וָֽאֶקְבְּצֵ֗ם אֶל־הַנָּהָר֙ הַבָּ֣א אֶֽל־אַהֲוָ֔א וַנַּחֲנֶ֥ה שָׁ֖ם יָמִ֣ים שְׁלֹשָׁ֑ה 1 **Them** means everyone listed in [8:2–14](../08/02.md), everyone who would be traveling with Ezra. The implication is that they all packed for the trip and set out from their homes, but then assembled at a location outside of the city of Babylon where Ezra could make sure the group was ready for the trip. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I had everyone who was going to be traveling with me assemble on the banks of the river that flows from Babylon to Ahava. We camped there for three days so that I could make sure that we had enough temple personnel with us and that we could transport the gold and silver safely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
8:15 gl34 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names הַנָּהָר֙ הַבָּ֣א אֶֽל־אַהֲוָ֔א 1 The exact location of this river on whose banks the group assembled can no longer be identified. In [8:21](../08/21.md) and [8:31](../08/31.md), Ezra calls it the Ahava River, and you could use that same name here if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the Ahava River” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
8:15 uqev rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive וַנַּחֲנֶ֥ה 1 As Ezra tells his story, he uses **we** in the exclusive sense, that is, it excludes the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||||
8:15 cl4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וָאָבִ֤ינָה 1 The word **And** at the beginning of this phrase indicates that this event took place at the same time as the event the story has just related. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show this relationship in this case by using a phrase such as “while we were there.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1289,7 +1287,7 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
10:21 vq5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מַעֲשֵׂיָ֤ה וְאֵֽלִיָּה֙ וּֽשְׁמַֽעְיָ֔ה וִיחִיאֵ֖ל וְעֻזִיָּֽה 1 These are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:22 bs2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּמִבְּנֵ֖י פַּשְׁח֑וּר 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “And from the descendants of Pashhur” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
10:22 yf1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֶלְיוֹעֵינַ֤י מַֽעֲשֵׂיָה֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣אל נְתַנְאֵ֔ל יוֹזָבָ֖ד וְאֶלְעָשָֽׂה 1 These are the names of six men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:23 ef8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names הַלְוִיִּ֑ם 1 # General Information:\n\nSee how you translated **Levites** in [2:40](../02/40.md). Review the explanation in the note there if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:23 ef8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names הַלְוִיִּ֑ם 1 See how you translated **Levites** in [2:40](../02/40.md). Review the explanation in the note there if that would be helpful. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:23 y5l2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names יוֹזָבָ֣ד וְשִׁמְעִ֗י וְקֵֽלָיָה֙ ה֣וּא קְלִיטָ֔א פְּתַֽחְיָ֥ה יְהוּדָ֖ה וֶאֱלִיעֶֽזֶר 1 These are the names of six men and an alternate name for one of them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:24 mpru הַמְשֹׁרְרִ֖ים 1 The term **singers** refers to the same occupational group as in [2:41](../02/41.md). Review the explanation in the note there if that would be helpful.
|
||||
10:24 cg6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֶלְיָשִׁ֑יב 1 **Eliashib** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1298,7 +1296,7 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
10:25 edlz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit וּמִֽיִּשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 All of the men in the lists in this chapter were Israelites. So the phrase **from Israel** refers to the other Israelite men who did not belong to the clans or groups mentioned in the previous lists. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “These were from the rest of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
10:25 frh1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִבְּנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֡שׁ 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Parosh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
10:25 y951 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names רַ֠מְיָה וְיִזִּיָּ֤ה וּמַלְכִּיָּה֙ וּמִיָּמִ֣ן וְאֶלְעָזָ֔ר וּמַלְכִּיָּ֖ה וּבְנָיָֽה 1 These are the names of seven men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:26 n4c3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּמִבְּנֵ֖י עֵילָ֑ם 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Elam” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
10:26 n4c3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּמִבְּנֵ֖י עֵילָ֑ם 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Elam” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
10:26 xd7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מַתַּנְיָ֤ה זְכַרְיָה֙ וִיחִיאֵ֣ל וְעַבְדִּ֔י וִירֵמ֖וֹת וְאֵלִיָּֽה 1 These are the names of six men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:27 t24c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּמִבְּנֵ֖י זַתּ֑וּא 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Zattu” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
10:27 x1id rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֶלְיוֹעֵנַ֤י אֶלְיָשִׁיב֙ מַתַּנְיָ֣ה וִֽירֵמ֔וֹת וְזָבָ֖ד וַעֲזִיזָֽא 1 These are the names of six men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1306,23 +1304,23 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
|
|||
10:28 jfh1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names יְהוֹחָנָ֥ן חֲנַנְיָ֖ה זַבַּ֥י עַתְלָֽי 1 These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:29 n4fe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּמִבְּנֵ֖י בָּנִ֑י 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Bani” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
10:29 j32x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מְשֻׁלָּ֤ם מַלּוּךְ֙ וַעֲדָיָ֔ה יָשׁ֖וּב וּשְׁאָ֥ל ירמות 1 These are the names of six men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:30 gmx3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּמִבְּנֵ֛י פַּחַ֥ת מוֹאָ֖ב 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Pahath-Moab” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
10:30 gmx3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּמִבְּנֵ֛י פַּחַ֥ת מוֹאָ֖ב 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Pahath-Moab” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
10:30 phn5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names עַדְנָ֣א וּכְלָ֑ל בְּנָיָ֤ה מַעֲשֵׂיָה֙ מַתַּנְיָ֣ה בְצַלְאֵ֔ל וּבִנּ֖וּי וּמְנַשֶּֽׁה 1 These are the names of eight men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:31 xr3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor וּבְנֵ֖י חָרִ֑ם 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Harim” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
10:31 z6j4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names אֱלִיעֶ֧זֶר יִשִּׁיָּ֛ה מַלְכִּיָּ֖ה שְׁמַֽעְיָ֥ה שִׁמְעֽוֹן 1 These are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:32 gyh9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בְּנְיָמִ֥ן מַלּ֖וּךְ שְׁמַרְיָֽה 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:33 uek2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִבְּנֵ֖י חָשֻׁ֑ם 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Hashum” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
10:33 uek2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִבְּנֵ֖י חָשֻׁ֑ם 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Hashum” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
10:33 my1a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names חָשֻׁ֑ם מַתְּנַ֤י מַתַּתָּה֙ זָבָ֣ד אֱלִיפֶ֔לֶט יְרֵמַ֥י מְנַשֶּׁ֖ה שִׁמְעִֽי 1 These are the names of eight men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:34 v361 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִבְּנֵ֣י בָנִ֔י 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Bani” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
10:34 yixc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מַעֲדַ֥י עַמְרָ֖ם וְאוּאֵֽל 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:35 pcb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names בְּנָיָ֥ה בֵדְיָ֖ה כלהי 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:36 h5e9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names וַנְיָ֥ה מְרֵמ֖וֹת אֶלְיָשִֽׁיב 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:37 j4vh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מַתַּנְיָ֥ה מַתְּנַ֖י ויעשו 1 # General Information:\n\nThese are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:37 j4vh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מַתַּנְיָ֥ה מַתְּנַ֖י ויעשו 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:38 z3zn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names וּבָנִ֥י וּבִנּ֖וּי שִׁמְעִֽי 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:38 p5vk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants וּבָנִ֥י וּבִנּ֖וּי שִׁמְעִֽי 1 The ULT represents the reading of the Hebrew text, but many scholars believe that the correct reading of this verse is found in ancient Greek translations. This is represented in the UST. You may choose to follow the reading of the preferred Bible translation used in your area, and include the other reading in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||||
10:39 maz3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names וְשֶֽׁלֶמְיָ֥ה וְנָתָ֖ן וַעֲדָיָֽה 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:40 jlxi rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names מַכְנַדְבַ֥י שָׁשַׁ֖י שָׁרָֽי 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:41 mf9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names עֲזַרְאֵ֥ל וְשֶׁלֶמְיָ֖הוּ שְׁמַרְיָֽה 1 # General Information:\n\nThese are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:41 mf9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names עֲזַרְאֵ֥ל וְשֶׁלֶמְיָ֖הוּ שְׁמַרְיָֽה 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:42 y5rp rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names שַׁלּ֥וּם אֲמַרְיָ֖ה יוֹסֵֽף 1 These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
10:43 cab3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor מִבְּנֵ֖י נְב֑וֹ 1 Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “From the descendants of Nebo” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
10:43 tih9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names יְעִיאֵ֤ל מַתִּתְיָה֙ זָבָ֣ד זְבִינָ֔א יַדַּ֥י וְיוֹאֵ֖ל בְּנָיָֽה 1 These are the names of seven men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
Can't render this file because it is too large.
|
26
tn_JHN.tsv
26
tn_JHN.tsv
|
|
@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
1:39 k5m2 μένει 1 See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse.
|
||||
1:39 ydqg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν ἡμέραν ἐκείνην 1 Here, **that day** refers to the day the two disciples left John the Baptist to follow Jesus, as indicated in verse [35](../01/35.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same day that they left John” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
1:39 tb9j ὥρα & δεκάτη 1 In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. Here, **the tenth hour** indicates a time in the late afternoon, before dark, at which it would be too late to start traveling to another town. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “about 4:00 PM”
|
||||
1:40 x8g8 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses [40–42] give background information about Andrew and how he brought his brother Peter to Jesus.
|
||||
1:40-42 x8g8 0 # General Information:\n\nVerses [40–42] give background information about Andrew and how he brought his brother Peter to Jesus.
|
||||
1:40 f6b9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰωάννου 1 Here, **John** refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
1:40 jmyp Σίμωνος Πέτρου 1 **Simon** was also called **Peter** by Jesus, as recorded in verse [42](../01/42.md). Alternate translation: “Simon, who is also called Peter”
|
||||
1:41 xpi4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 **This one** here refers to Andrew, who was mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Andrew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
2:19 mp6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative λύσατε τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ αὐτόν 1 This is an imperative, but it should be translated as introducing a hypothetical situation rather than as a command. Jesus is stating a hypothetical situation in which the event in the second clause would happen if the event in the first clause took place. In this case, Jesus would certainly **raise** the **temple** up if the Jewish authorities were to **destroy** it. Alternate translation: “If you destroy this temple, then in three days I will raise it up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||||
2:19 of4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo λύσατε τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ αὐτόν 1 Here, John records Jesus using the words **Destroy** and **raise** to describe his killing and resurrection, as if tearing down and rebuilding a building. However, the Jewish leaders did not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to them. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
|
||||
2:20 qb4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion σὺ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερεῖς αὐτόν? 1 The Jewish leaders are using the question form for emphasis. They think that Jesus wants to tear down the temple and rebuild it in three days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot possibly rebuild it in three days!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
2:21 g6jx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 21–22](../02/21.md) are a comment John made about the story that was described in [2:13–20](../02/13.md). These verses tell about something that happened later. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||||
2:21-22 g6jx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 21–22](../02/21.md) are a comment John made about the story that was described in [2:13–20](../02/13.md). These verses tell about something that happened later. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||||
2:21 b440 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνος δὲ ἔλεγεν 1 Here, **that one** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “But Jesus was speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
2:22 oznm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 **Therefore** indicates that in this verse John is giving the result of Jesus making the statement in [2:19](../02/19.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because Jesus said this about his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
2:22 jejg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠγέρθη ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him from the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
5:47 b8dd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν πιστεύσετε? 1 Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you will certainly never believe my words!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
5:47 x7h9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν 1 Here, **words** refers to what Jesus said to these Jewish leaders. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what I have told you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
6:intro xe4t 0 # John 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus’ fourth sign: Jesus feeds a large crowd (6:1–14)\n2. Jesus’ fifth sign: Jesus walks on the Sea of Galilee (6:15–21)\n3. Jesus says he is the bread of life (6:22–71)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### King\n\nThe king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food. They thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people’s sins and that the world would persecute his people.\n\n## Important Metaphors in this Chapter\n\n### Bread\n\nBread was the most common and important food in Jesus’ day, so the word “bread” was their general word for “food.” It is often difficult to translate the word “bread” into the languages of people who do not eat bread, because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus’ culture. Jesus used the word “bread” to refer to himself. He wanted the people to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life, just as people need food to sustain physical life. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])\n\n### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood\n\nWhen Jesus said, “unless you would eat the flesh of the Son of Man and would drink his blood, you do not have life in yourselves,” he was speaking of believing in his sacrificial death on the cross for the forgiveness of sins. He also knew that before he died he would tell his followers to commemorate this sacrifice by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand to what the metaphor referred. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Parenthetical ideas\n\nSeveral times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some background information needed to better understand the story. These explanations are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. This information is placed inside parentheses.\n\n### “Son of Man”\n\nJesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
6:1 qhj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nJesus had traveled from Jerusalem to Galilee. A crowd has followed him up a mountainside. Verses [1–4](../06/01.md) tell the setting of this part of the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
6:1-4 qhj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nJesus had traveled from Jerusalem to Galilee. A crowd has followed him up a mountainside. Verses [1–4](../06/01.md) tell the setting of this part of the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
6:1 el4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 This phrase, **After these things**, introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
6:1 z345 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς θαλάσσης τῆς Γαλιλαίας τῆς Τιβεριάδος 1 The **Sea of Galilee** was called by several names, one of which was Sea **of Tiberias**. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/seaofgalilee]]) If having two different names for the same place would be confusing in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the Sea of Galilee (also known as the Sea of Tiberias)” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
6:2 ebel rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ὄχλος πολύς 1 See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1325,7 +1325,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
9:41 jmq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor λέγετε, ὅτι βλέπομεν, ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει 1 See how you translated **see** in [verse 39](../09/39.md). Alternate translation: “you say, ‘We know God’s truth.’ Your sin remains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
9:41 ch0y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes λέγετε, ὅτι βλέπομεν, ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “you say that you see, so your sin remains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||||
10:intro e8mb 0 # John 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus tells the Parable of the Sheep Pen (10:1–6)\n2. Jesus says he is the gate of the sheep pen (10:7–10)\n3. Jesus says he is the Good Shepherd (10:11–18)\n4. The Jewish leaders disagree about who Jesus is (10:19–21)\n5. Jesus says he is God at the Festival of Dedication (10:22–42)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Blasphemy\n\nBlasphemy is when a person claims that he is God or claims that God has told him to speak when God has not told him to speak. The law of Moses commanded the Israelites to kill blasphemers by throwing stones at them until they died. When Jesus said, “I and the Father are one,” the Jews thought he was blaspheming, so they picked up stones to kill him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Parables\n\nParables were short stories that Jesus told so that people who wanted to believe in him could easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. People who did not want to believe in him would not be able to understand the message ([10:1–6](../10/01.md)).\n\n### Sheep\n\nJesus spoke metaphorically of people as sheep because sheep do not see well, do not think well, often walk away from those who care for them, and cannot defend themselves when other animals attack them. God’s people are similar to sheep in that they also are weak and do foolish things like rebelling against God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/sheep]])\n\n### Sheep pen\n\nA sheep pen was a space with a stone wall around it in which shepherds would keep their sheep for periods of time, such as over night. There were large sheep pens in which multiple flocks were kept, and also smaller sheep pens for a single flock. Once they were inside the sheep pen, the sheep could not run away, and animals and thieves could not easily get inside to kill or steal them. In [10:1–5](../10/01.md), Jesus uses the sheep pen as a metaphor for the people of Israel. Out of the “sheep pen” of the Jewish people, Jesus calls his first “sheep.”\n\n### Laying down and taking up life\n\nJesus speaks of his life as if it were a physical object that he could: (1) lay down on the ground, which is a metaphor for dying, or (2) pick up again, which is a metaphor for becoming alive again.
|
||||
10:1 gzd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 1–5](../10/01.md), Jesus speaks a parable, which he then uses for teaching purposes in [verses 7–18](../10/07.md). Here, the “shepherd” is a metaphor for Jesus and “sheep” is a metaphor for people. “His own sheep” are the people who follow Jesus, and the **thief**, **robber**, and “strangers” are the Jewish leaders, including the Pharisees, who try to deceive the people. Since Jesus does not explain the meaning of this parable here, you should not explain the metaphors within the parable itself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
|
||||
10:1-5 gzd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 1–5](../10/01.md), Jesus speaks a parable, which he then uses for teaching purposes in [verses 7–18](../10/07.md). Here, the “shepherd” is a metaphor for Jesus and “sheep” is a metaphor for people. “His own sheep” are the people who follow Jesus, and the **thief**, **robber**, and “strangers” are the Jewish leaders, including the Pharisees, who try to deceive the people. Since Jesus does not explain the meaning of this parable here, you should not explain the metaphors within the parable itself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
|
||||
10:1 ab9x Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nIn [verses 1–21](../10/01.md), Jesus continues to speak to the Pharisees whom he was speaking with at the end of the last chapter. This section continues the story which began in [9:35](../09/35.md).
|
||||
10:1 i3tj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
10:1 xq1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown αὐλὴν τῶν προβάτων 1 A **sheep pen** is an enclosed or fenced area where a shepherd keeps his sheep. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. If your readers would not be familiar with this way of protecting livestock, you could use a general expression for a roofless space surrounded by walls or a fence. Alternate translation: “walled area for protecting the sheep” or “place where sheep are kept” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1574,7 +1574,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
11:49 lj6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ὑμεῖς οὐκ οἴδατε οὐδέν 1 Here, **Caiaphas** uses an exaggeration in order to insult his hearers. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows contempt. Alternate translation: “You do not understand what is happening” or “You speak as though you know nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||||
11:50 fvry rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ ἔθνος ἀπόληται 1 Caiaphas implies that the Roman army would kill all of the people of the Jewish **nation** if Jesus is allowed to live and cause a rebellion. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the Romans would not kill all the people of our nation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
11:50 zh9n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ ἔθνος ἀπόληται 1 Here, **nation** refers to all of the Jewish people. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “and all the people of our nation would not perish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
11:51 qww5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 51–52](../11/51.md) John interrupts the story to explain that Caiaphas was prophesying even though he did not realize it at the time. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
11:51-52 qww5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 51–52](../11/51.md) John interrupts the story to explain that Caiaphas was prophesying even though he did not realize it at the time. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
11:51 kw41 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ 1 Here, **from himself** could mean: (1) Caiaphas was speaking something he had thought of himself. Alternate translation: “on his own initiative” (2) Caiaphas was speaking from his own authority, which is how the phrase is used in [5:19](../05/19.md). Alternate translation: “on his own authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
11:51 mw4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀλλὰ ἀρχιερεὺς ὢν τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ἐκείνου 1 This clause indicates the reason why Caiaphas **prophesied** a true prophecy from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he was high priest that year” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||||
11:51 eh17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἀποθνῄσκειν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἔθνους 1 See how you translated **nation** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1590,7 +1590,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
11:54 h5jk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κἀκεῖ ἔμεινεν μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν 1 Jesus and his disciples **stayed** in Ephraim for a short period of time. If your language requires a length of time for **stayed**, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “There he stayed with the disciples for a time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
11:55 qd5y ἀνέβησαν & εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 The phrase **went up** is used here because Jerusalem is at a higher elevation than the surrounding areas. See how you translated **went up** in [7:10](../07/10.md).
|
||||
11:55 rsgm τῆς χώρας 1 Here, **country** could refer to: (1) an area of land. Alternate translation: “the area” or “the district” (2) the rural area outside cities where fewer people live. Alternate translation: “the countryside” or “the rural area”
|
||||
11:56 a5kt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events 0 # General Information:\n\nThe event in [verse 57](../11/57.md) occurs before the event in this verse. If this order might confuse your readers, you can combine these verses and put the text of [verse 57](../11/57.md) before the text of this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||||
11:56-57 a5kt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events 0 # General Information:\n\nThe event in [verse 57](../11/57.md) occurs before the event in this verse. If this order might confuse your readers, you can combine these verses and put the text of [verse 57](../11/57.md) before the text of this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||||
11:56 kc75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐζήτουν & τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 Here, **they** refers to the Jewish people who had traveled to Jerusalem before the Passover celebration, as described in the previous verse. If this use of **they** might be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people who came to Jerusalem before the Passover celebration were looking for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
11:56 y3xz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 The people were standing in the courtyard of **the temple**. See how you translated **temple** in [verse 14](../08/14.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||||
11:56 i7en rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τί δοκεῖ ὑμῖν 1 This is an idiom used to ask for someone’s opinion. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “What is your opinion” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1719,7 +1719,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
12:35 h0q9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ περιπατῶν ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ 1 Jesus uses this phrase to refer to a person who lives a sinful life and behaves sinfully. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the one who lives sinfully” or “the one who does not behave righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
12:36 j1rs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ φῶς & εἰς τὸ φῶς 1 Both occurrences of **the light** here refer to Jesus. See how you translated **light** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
12:36 xu4p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom υἱοὶ φωτὸς 1 Here, **sons of light** is an idiom that refers to people who live according to God’s truth and goodness, which Jesus has revealed to them. Here, **sons** does not refer specifically to male children and **light** does not refer to Jesus. If this expression would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “people who share in God’s truth and goodness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
12:37 s1wh rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 37–43](../12/37.md) John interrupts the main storyline in order to explain how the Jewish people had fulfilled prophecies that had been spoken by the prophet Isaiah. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information for these verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
12:37-43 s1wh rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 37–43](../12/37.md) John interrupts the main storyline in order to explain how the Jewish people had fulfilled prophecies that had been spoken by the prophet Isaiah. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information for these verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
12:37 g1z3 σημεῖα 1 See how you translated **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”
|
||||
12:38 k15e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα ὁ λόγος Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου πληρωθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order to fulfill the word of Isaiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
12:38 n4m7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου 1 Here, **word** refers to the specific prophecy written down by Isaiah that is quoted in the second half of this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this prophecy of Isaiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1767,7 +1767,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
12:50 tar2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἶδα, ὅτι ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **his command** refers to the teachings that God commanded Jesus to speak, as mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know that what he commanded me to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
12:50 q9cr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ ζωὴ αἰώνιός ἐστιν 1 This phrase means that what God commanded Jesus to say gives **eternal life** to those who believe it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “his command gives eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
13:intro zk68 0 # John 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. The Passover meal begins: Jesus washes his disciples’ feet (13:1–20)\n2. Jesus predicts that Judas will betray him (13:21–30)\n3. Jesus commands his disciples to love each other (13:31–35)\n4. Jesus predicts that Peter will deny him (13:36–38)\n\nThe events of this chapter are commonly referred to as the “Last Supper.” In many ways this Passover meal parallels the sacrifice of Jesus as the lamb of God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lordssupper]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The washing of feet\n\nPeople in the Ancient Near East thought that feet were very dirty. Only servants would wash people’s feet. The disciples did not want Jesus to wash their feet, because they considered him to be their master and themselves to be his servants, and it was a servant’s job to wash the feet of master and guests. However, Jesus wanted to show them that his disciples need to humbly serve and love each other. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])\n\n### I AM\n\nJohn records Jesus saying these words as an independent phrase one time in this chapter ([13:19](../13/19.md)). They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew expression “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses in [Exodus 3:14](../../exo/03/14.md). For these reasons many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “The disciple whom Jesus loved”\n\nThe Apostle John first referred to himself as the disciple “whom Jesus loved” in this chapter ([13:23](../13/23.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. If this is the case, then you will need to add a first person pronoun to these references and the other references to John in ([13:23–25](../13/23.md)). If your language can retain the third person references, then you may still want to make these references to John explicit by adding “John” next to them. See the discussion of this in Part 1 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/johntheapostle]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n\n### “Son of Man”\n\nJesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([13:31](../13/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
13:1 wk2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIt is not yet **Passover**, and **Jesus** is with his disciples for the evening meal. [Verses 1–4](../13/01.md) explain the setting of the story and give background information about Jesus and Judas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
13:1-4 wk2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nIt is not yet **Passover**, and **Jesus** is with his disciples for the evening meal. [Verses 1–4](../13/01.md) explain the setting of the story and give background information about Jesus and Judas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
13:1 z4q9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἦλθεν αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα 1 Here, the word **hour** is used to refer to the time God had planned for Jesus to be arrested and killed. See how you translated this word in [7:30](../07/30.md). Alternate translation: “the right time to arrest him had come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||||
13:1 w7w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατέρα 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
|
||||
13:1 a1w4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς ἰδίους τοὺς ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 This phrase refers to Jesus’ disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his own disciples who were with him in the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -2212,7 +2212,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
17:26 gk2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ ἀγάπη ἣν ἠγάπησάς με, ἐν αὐτοῖς ᾖ 1 Here Jesus speaks of God’s **love** as if it were an object that could be inside a person. If this use of **love** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they may love others in the same way that you have loved me” or “the love with which you have loved me may be experienced by them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
17:26 ilzj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 Here, Jesus uses the word **in** to express the close personal relationship between himself and those who believe in him. See how you translated a similar phrase in [10:38](../10/38.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||||
18:intro ltl2 0 # John 18 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Soldiers and guards arrest Jesus (18:1–11)\n2. The priests question Jesus, and Peter denies Jesus (18:12–27)\n3. Pilate questions Jesus (18:28–40)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “It is not lawful for us to put any man to death”\n\nThe Roman government did not allow the Jews to kill criminals, so the Jews needed to ask Pilate, the governor, to kill him ([18:31](../18/31.md)).\n\n### King of the Jews\n\nWhen Pilate asked if Jesus were the King of the Jews ([18:33](../18/33.md)), he was asking if Jesus were claiming to be a political leader like King Herod, whom the Romans allowed to rule Judea. When he asked the crowd if he should release the King of the Jews ([18:39](../18/39.md)), he is mocking the Jews, because the Romans and Jews hated each other. He was also mocking Jesus, because he did not think that Jesus was a king at all. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
|
||||
18:1 sq3t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 1–2](../18/01.md) give background information for the events that follow. Verse 1 says where the events took place. Verse 2 gives background information about Judas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
18:1-2 sq3t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 1–2](../18/01.md) give background information for the events that follow. Verse 1 says where the events took place. Verse 2 gives background information about Judas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
18:1 cxz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ταῦτα εἰπὼν, Ἰησοῦς 1 John uses this phrase to mark the beginning of a new event that happened soon after the events that the story has just told. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Soon after Jesus spoke these words, he” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
18:1 pxtm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ χειμάρρου τοῦ Κεδρὼν 1 John is using **of** to describe a **brook** that is called **Kidron**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Kidron Brook” or “the brook that people called ‘Kidron’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||||
18:1 z9bw rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τοῦ χειμάρρου τοῦ Κεδρὼν 1 **Kidron** is a valley in Jerusalem that is between the Temple Mount and the Mount of Olives. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -2432,7 +2432,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
19:35 p17b rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 This verse is a break from the main storyline in which John provides some background information about himself. John is telling readers that they can trust what he has written because he saw these events happen. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
19:35 bs5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ ἑωρακὼς & αὐτοῦ & ἐκεῖνος οἶδεν ὅτι ἀληθῆ λέγει 1 These phrases refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. He is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the one who saw this … my … I know that I speak the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
19:35 c9q7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς πιστεύητε 1 John is leaving out some of the words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “so that you would also believe that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
19:36 wid6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 36–37](../19/36.md) are another break from the main storyline in which John tells us that the two events in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md) made some prophecies in scripture come true. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
19:36-37 wid6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 36–37](../19/36.md) are another break from the main storyline in which John tells us that the two events in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md) made some prophecies in scripture come true. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
19:36 uyvo rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations ἐγένετο & ταῦτα, ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ 1 Here John uses **that the scripture would be fulfilled** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 34:20](../../psa/34/20.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “these things happened in order that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
|
||||
19:36 l8zi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐγένετο & ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to the two events described in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md). If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the soldiers did not break Jesus’ legs but pierced his side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
19:36 qwl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order to fulfill the words that someone wrote in scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -2559,7 +2559,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
20:29 q81m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πεπίστευκας & πιστεύσαντες 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you have believed that I have become alive again … having believed that I have become alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
20:29 sax7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μακάριοι οἱ μὴ ἰδόντες 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God blesses those not having seen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
20:29 q9fb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis μὴ ἰδόντες 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “not having seen me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
20:30 yd1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 30–31](../20/30.md) John comments about the story he has written in chapters 1 through 20. He also states his reason for writing this book. He does this in order to indicate that the story is almost finished. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||||
20:30-31 yd1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 30–31](../20/30.md) John comments about the story he has written in chapters 1 through 20. He also states his reason for writing this book. He does this in order to indicate that the story is almost finished. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||||
20:30 azxu σημεῖα 1 See how you translated the term **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles”
|
||||
20:30 xz6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τούτῳ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since John wrote this Gospel, you should use the first person pronoun “I” to indicate who did the action. Alternate translation: “which I have not written in this book” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
20:31 zlc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** could mean: (1) the miraculous signs that John wrote about in his Gospel and mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “these signs” (2) everything that John wrote about in his Gospel. Alternate translation: “everything in this book” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -2573,7 +2573,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
21:intro e1bg 0 # John 21 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Jesus eats breakfast with his disciples (21:1–14)\n2. Jesus restores Peter as his disciple (21:15–19)\n3. Jesus and Peter speak about John (21:20–23)\n4. John concludes his Gospel (21:24–25)\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The metaphor of sheep\n\nBefore Jesus died, he spoke of himself taking care of his people as if he were a good shepherd taking care of sheep ([10:11](../10/11.md)). After he became alive again, Jesus commanded Peter to take care of other believers in the same way. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “The disciple whom Jesus loved”\n\nThe apostle John referred to himself as the disciple “whom Jesus loved” twice in this chapter ([21:7](../21/07.md), [20](../21/20.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. If this is the case, then you will need to use a first person pronoun for these references and the other references to John throughout this chapter. You would also need to use first person plural pronouns in this chapter for all references to the disciples as a group, since John was one of them. If your language can retain the third person references, then you may want to make these references to John explicit by adding “John” next to them. See the discussion of this in Part 1 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/johntheapostle]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n\n### Different words for “love”\n\nIn [verses 15–17](../21/15.md), Jesus and Peter speak to each other using two different words in the original language that could both be translated as “love.” These words are often used interchangeably. However, when they are used together, as in [verses 15–17](../21/15.md), they can have slightly different meanings. One word can refer to a type of love that is based on affection and friendship, but the other word can refer to a type of love that is based on sincere devotion and high esteem for the person being loved. Although the UST translates both of these words as “love,” the notes will provide more specific alternatives.
|
||||
21:1 x44v rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 # General Information:\n\nThis phrase introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||||
21:1 yj6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names θαλάσσης τῆς Τιβεριάδος 1 This **Sea** was also called “the Sea of Galilee.” See how you translated the similar name in [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
21:2 et5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 2–3](../21/02.md) provide background information on what happens in the story before Jesus appears to his disciples at the Sea of Tiberias. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
21:2-3 et5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\n[Verses 2–3](../21/02.md) provide background information on what happens in the story before Jesus appears to his disciples at the Sea of Tiberias. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||||
21:2 b421 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Θωμᾶς ὁ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος 1 See how you translated this phrase in [11:16](../11/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
21:2 m4gx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κανὰ τῆς Γαλιλαίας 1 See how you translated **Cana of Galilee** in [2:1](../02/01.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||||
21:2 xyiv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου 1 This phrase refers to the disciples John and James, whom Jesus called “sons of thunder” in [Mark 3:17](../../mrk/03/17.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “James and I, the sons of Zebedee” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -2646,7 +2646,7 @@ front:intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
21:23 cs14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 The pronoun **him** here refers to Peter. If this might confuse your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
21:23 elmi rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὅτι οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει & αὐτὸν 1 The pronouns **he** and **him** here refer to John. If this might confuse your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||||
21:23 qxqr ἐὰν αὐτὸν θέλω μένειν ἕως ἔρχομαι, τί πρὸς σέ 1 See how you translated this sentence in the previous verse.
|
||||
21:24 s5bp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 24–25](../21/24.md) John indicates the end of his Gospel by giving a closing comment about himself and what he has written in this book. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||||
21:24-25 s5bp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 # General Information:\n\nIn [verses 24–25](../21/24.md) John indicates the end of his Gospel by giving a closing comment about himself and what he has written in this book. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||||
21:24 d6t5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ μαθητὴς ὁ μαρτυρῶν περὶ τούτων, καὶ ὁ γράψας ταῦτα, καὶ οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀληθὴς αὐτοῦ ἡ μαρτυρία ἐστίν 1 In this verse John is speaking about himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I am the disciple who testifies about these things and who wrote these things, and we know that my testimony is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||||
21:24 f7ww rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τούτων & ταῦτα 1 In this verse, **these things** refers to everything that John has written in this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “everything in this book … all these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
21:24 h5i9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive οἴδαμεν 1 Here the pronoun **we** is exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
Can't render this file because it is too large.
|
|
|
@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
5:4 nep6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he shattered his shackles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
5:4 fk7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown πέδαις 1 Here, **shackles** are pieces of metal that people wrap around the arms and legs of prisoners. The shackles are then attached with chains to objects that do not move so the prisoners cannot move far. Think of an object in your culture that is used to constrain people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||||
5:6 y6c2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ ἰδὼν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἀπὸ μακρόθεν, ἔδραμεν καὶ προσεκύνησεν αὐτῷ 1 After **having seen Jesus**, the man then ran to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After the man saw Jesus from a distance, he then ran to him and bowed down before him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||||
5:7 ux6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events 0 # General Information:\n\nIf it would be helpful in your language, the information in this verse and 5:8 may be reordered to present the events in the order that they happened, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||||
5:7-8 ux6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events 0 # General Information:\n\nIf it would be helpful in your language, the information in this verse and 5:8 may be reordered to present the events in the order that they happened, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||||
5:7 ppu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί Ἰησοῦ, Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου? 1 The unclean spirit asks this question out of fear. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Leave me alone, Jesus, Son of the Most High God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||||
5:7 kd19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου 1 **Son of the Most High God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
|
||||
5:9 h6ch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive λέγει αὐτῷ, Λεγιὼν ὄνομά μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ἐσμεν. 1 The spirit who is speaking speaks on behalf of all of the spirits who are possessing the man. Here, **we** includes him and all of the other spirits. Make sure that this is understood in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1046,7 +1046,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
12:41 rl1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πολλά 1 Mark is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “much money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
12:42 g6ry rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney λεπτὰ δύο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης 1 The word **lepta** is the plural of “lepton.” A lepton was a small bronze or copper coin used by the Jews. It was equivalent to a few minutes’ wages. It was the least valuable coin that people used in this culture. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead, you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or use a general expression. Alternate translation: “two pennies” or “two small coins of little value” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
|
||||
12:42 n29e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης 1 A **quadrans** was the smallest Roman coin. Mark is seeking to help his readers, who are Roman, understand the value of **two leptas** in their own currency. You could clarify in your translation that a **quadrans** is a Roman coin, as the UST does, or you can leave this information untranslated. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
|
||||
12:43 ipl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verse 43 Jesus says that the widow put more money in the offering than the rich people put in, and in verse 44 he gives his reason for saying that. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 43–44, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||||
12:43-44 ipl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verse 43 Jesus says that the widow put more money in the offering than the rich people put in, and in verse 44 he gives his reason for saying that. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 43–44, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||||
12:43 q124 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 See how you translated the statement **Truly I say to you** in [3:28](../03/28.md).
|
||||
12:43 ih0m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ χήρα αὕτη ἡ πτωχὴ 1 Even though it is not literally true that the widow has put more money into the offering box than all the rich people, this is still not figurative language. As Jesus explains in the next verse, he means that she has put in proportionately more than all the others, relative to her means, and that is literally true. But Jesus makes the seemingly untrue statement first, using it to get his disciples to reflect on how it can be true. So it would be appropriate to translate Jesus’ words directly and not interpret them as if they were figurative. For example, it would be a figurative interpretation to say, “God considers what this poor widow has given to be more valuable than the gifts of all the others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||||
12:43 n8z5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντων & τῶν βαλλόντων 1 In context, **all** means specifically all of the rich people who were putting large monetary gifts in the collection boxes. Alternate translation: “all of those rich people putting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
|
|
@ -1137,7 +1137,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
|
|||
13:20 q8hm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the phrase **be saved** refers to being saved from physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone would die” or “no one would survive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||||
13:20 fz5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς, οὓς ἐξελέξατο 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase to express the idea and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the people whom he chose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||||
13:20 af7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς 1 Jesus is using the adjective **elect** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase as modeled by the UST.(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||||
13:21 d9gr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verse 21 Jesus gives a command, and in verse 22 he gives the reason for the command. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 21–22 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||||
13:21-22 d9gr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verse 21 Jesus gives a command, and in verse 22 he gives the reason for the command. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 21–22 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||||
13:21 qsfu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ τότε ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, ἴδε, ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἴδε, ἐκεῖ, μὴ πιστεύετε 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And do not believe anyone who says to you that the Christ is either here or there” or “And do not believe anyone who says to you that the Christ is in this location or that location” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||||
13:21 yfd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἴδε, ἐκεῖ 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Look, there is the Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||||
13:22 yw81 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγερθήσονται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “will arise” or “will come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
Can't render this file because it is too large.
|
Loading…
Reference in New Issue